Maintenance Terminal Manual PDF

#ANTHONY_GARDINER_TAGLIFTING_201212#
12
12
20
G_
IN
FT
LI
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE
AG
ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL

_T
ER
TOOL FOR MODERNIZATION

IN
RD
GA
Document code: 0466005.IEN

Version: 13 - HC 9.5
Y_
Date: 12/11/2011
ON
TH
AN
Copyright Orona 2011. All rights reserved.

INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 5
1.1. OBJECT ........................................................................................................... 5
12
1.2. TOOLS AND UTILITIES ...................................................................................... 5
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE CONFIGURATION TOOL ........................................................ 6
12
3. HANDLING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL ................................................................. 7
3.1. Connecting Points ............................................................................................ 7
20
3.2. CONNECTING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL .......................................................... 8
G_
INITIAL STAGE ........................................................................................................ 8
CONNECTING TO ARCA CONTROLLERS ....................................................................... 9
IN
CONNECTING TO ARCAII CONTROLLERS ..................................................................... 9
LOGGING ON THE CONTROLLER (BOTH ARCA AND ARCAII) ........................................ 10
FT
ACCESS MENU TREE............................................................................................... 11
4. OPERATING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL .............................................................. 11
4.1. LI
Moving through the Configuration Tool menus ................................................... 12
4.2. Movement through a dialogue menu ................................................................. 12
AG
4.3. Editing a parameter value ............................................................................... 13
4.4. Descriptive format of CT menus in this document ............................................... 14
_T
4.5. Example - Speeds .......................................................................................... 15

5. Device CT ......................................................................................................... 17
ER
5.1. Table of menus of CT ...................................................................................... 17

1 PRESENT ............................................................................................................ 17
IN
2 CT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................... 17
RD
6. Device Control .................................................................................................. 20

6.1. Table of menus of Control ............................................................................... 20
GA
1 FAULTS .............................................................................................................. 20
2 HYSTORIC ....................................................................................................... 26
Y_
3 VARIABLES ......................................................................................................... 28
4 FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 49
ON
5 PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................... 62
7 ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................... 101
TH
6.2. Description of the faults of the device Control ................................................... 103

7. Device Autodialler............................................................................................. 122
AN
7.1. Table of menus of Autodialler ......................................................................... 122

1 FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 122
2 EVENT TRACE .................................................................................................... 124
3 VARIABLES ........................................................................................................ 124
4 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 126
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 2/182

Copyright Orona 2011 HC 9.5
5 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 131

7 SETUP ............................................................................................................ 141
8 CALL CENTRE .................................................................................................... 141
7.2. Description of the faults of the device Autodialler .............................................. 142
12
8. Device LCD ...................................................................................................... 146
8.1. Table of menus of LCD ................................................................................... 146
12
2 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 146
3 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 146
20
4 PERSONALIZE .................................................................................................... 147
9. Device Door ..................................................................................................... 149
G_
9.1. Table of menus of Door .................................................................................. 149
1 FAULTS .......................................................................................................... 149
IN
2 HISTORIC ....................................................................................................... 150
FT
3 VARIABLES ..................................................................................................... 150
4 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 151
LI
5 PARAMETERS .................................................................................................. 153
6 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................... 154
AG
10. Device Load weigh ............................................................................................ 156
10.1. Table of menus of Load weigh......................................................................... 156
_T
1 FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 156

2 HYSTORIC ...................................................................................................... 157
ER
3 VARIABLES ........................................................................................................ 158

4 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 159
IN
5 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 162

6 SETUP .............................................................................................................. 163
RD
10.2. Description of the faults of the device Load weigh ............................................. 164
11. Device Regulator .............................................................................................. 165
GA
11.1. Table of menus of Regulator ........................................................................... 165

Y_
1 FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 165

2 HYSTORIC ...................................................................................................... 165
ON
3 VARIABLES ........................................................................................................ 166

4 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 167
TH
5 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 169

12. Device Load weigh_R ........................................................................................ 174
AN
12.1. Table of menus of Load weigh_R ..................................................................... 174

1 FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 174
2 VARIABLES ........................................................................................................ 174
3 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 175
4 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 175

13. ANNEXE 1 :STATUS OF THE VERTICAL MOVEMENT AUTOMATISMUS ....................... 177

14. ANNEXE 2: STATUS OF THE DOORS AUTOMATISMUS ........................................... 181
12
12
20
G_
IN
FT
LI
AG
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

1. INTRODUCTION
This document is about ORONAs Configuration Tool
12
1.1. OBJECT
Indicates how to connect the Configuration Tool to available devices and information that can
12
be obtained.
20
1.2. TOOLS AND UTILITIES
In an ARCA system the Configuration Tool needs a plug-in. This plug-in can be purchased from
G_
SGS department of ORONA. The part number is 5123000.
IN
SECURITY INDICATIONS
FT
CAUTION
This icon indicates that the installations can be damaged if you dont obey the
instructions.
LI
AG
ATTENTION
This icon indicates that there is additional information that can be important.
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE CONFIGURATION TOOL
12
Connection cable
12
20
Display screen
G_
IN
FT
LI
AG
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
Keyboard
AN
Connector
Box

3. HANDLING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

CAUTION
12
Do not store or use the Configuration Tool in extreme temperatures. The
recommended operating temperature is between 5C and 40C.
12
Avoid splashes or excessively damp atmospheres.
20
Avoid the condensation produced when going from a very cold to a very
hot atmosphere.
G_
Avoid knocks and drops.
Do not press on the display screen.
IN
Press on the keyboard gently (do not exert excessive pressure).
FT
Do not damage the connecting cable with cuts or excessive folding (do not
twist the cable).

of the connector.
LI
When connecting or disconnecting do not pull on the cable. Use the body
AG
3.1. Connecting Points

_T
The Configuration Tool can be connected to both ARCA and ARCAII controllers.
ITEM ARCA CONTROLLER ARCAII CONTROLLER
ER
Connection Connect direct to the Connect direct to the communications bus.

type controller
IN
Normal Only connector J9 on the Connector J27 of the communications bus of

connecting controllers Master Board the Master Board (PBCM)
RD
points (PBCM). Female-Female

adapter required. Connector J25 on the car roof switchboard
(PDCC).
GA
Connector J7 on the connecting strip of the

car control station (PCB).
Y_
Connecting None Extension cable 1 for landing control station.

points
ON
requiring an Monochrome LCD position indicator.

adaptation
cable
TH
Other None Gateway connector J1 for shared control

connecting stations (PGW).
AN
points for
multiplex lift Connector J43 on the controllers gong and
installations horizontal communications board (PCH/G).
External power supply to the Configuration
Tool required.
In an ARCA system the Configuration Tool can be connected to Main Controller

In an ARCAII system, the Configuration Tool can connect with the following devices:
A. Controller
B. Autodialler
C. Monochrome LCD position indicator.
12
D. Extensions 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5.
E. Orona load weighing switch.
12
F. Control Techniques V3F
G. Door Operator
20
G_
IN
FT
LI
AG
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Connection to ARCA controller Connection to ARCAII controller

Y_
3.2. CONNECTING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

ON
INITIAL STAGE
TH
ATTENTION
AN
Before connecting the Configuration Tool to the controller a check must be made
that:
The controller is on, RED pilot lamp on.
The lift car is at a standstill

1. Insert the Configuration Tool connector in the appropriate connector.

2. The display screen will show the following message:
12
ORONA (C)
12
3. Press any key.
20
4. The display screen will show this message:
G_
SEARCHING ARCA
IN
If you wish to connect to an ARCAII device you can push key to bypass the ARCA search
FT
phase.
CONNECTING TO ARCA CONTROLLERS
5.
LI
If the Configuration Tool has been connected to an ARCA controller, the
AG
controller log on window will be shown.
Ver UN:1.0 HC:1.00

_T
(12: 4:10)( 3/10/04)

Codigo: 0
ER
Clave [ 0]
IN
From now on, the procedure is similar for ARCA and ARCAII controllers and is described in
section 8.
RD
CONNECTING TO ARCAII CONTROLLERS

GA
4. Shortly after displaying the SEARCHING ARCA message, the screen changes to:
Y_
SEARCHING ARCAII
ON
5. Shortly after displaying the SEARCHING ARCAII message, the screen changes
TH
to:
* MAIN MENU *
AN
> 1.Present
2.CT Functions

6. Press after selecting option 1.Present to view the list of devices which the
Configuration Tool has found to be connected to the communications bus:
*1. PRESENT *
12
> 1.Control (0)
2.(R)Extensions
12
3.Autodialler
7. Press after selecting option 1.Control (0) to view the controller log on
20
menu that is similar to the ARCA controllers:
Ver UN:1.0 HC:1.00
G_
(12: 4:10)( 3/10/04)
Enter password:
IN
Password [ 0]
FT
8. Press (the cursor will be flashing between the Password brackets). Type the
password (maximum 4 digits).
9. Press again.
LI
AG
10. If a correct password has been entered, the screen displays the main menu;
otherwise, repeat the action, introducing the correct password.
_T
ER
LOGGING ON THE CONTROLLER (BOTH ARCA AND ARCAII)
CONTROLLER STEP 1. The display screen will show the input message:
IN
No. of the version of

the controller No. of the version of
programme the configuration
RD
tool programme
Time on the
controller clock Ver D:M1.0 HC:1.0 Date on the
GA
controller clock
(32: 4:10)( 3/10/96)
Basic access code
Y_
Password
Password [ 0]
ON
CONTROLLER STEP 2. Introducing the password:
1. Press (the cursor will be flashing between the Password brackets).

TH
2. Type the password (maximum 4 digits).

AN
3. Press again.

If a correct password has been entered, the screen displays the main menu; otherwise, repeat
the action, introducing the correct password.
Main Menu:
* ARCA CONTROL *
12
1-faults
2-hystoric
12
3-variables
20
ACCESS MENU TREE
Main Tree
G_
* ARCA CONTROL *
ORONA (C) 2004 ARCA 1-faults
IN
2-hystoric
3-variables
FT
Ver D:M1.70 TM 010
SEARCHING ARCA (12: 4:10)( 3/10/96)
Code : 1 2
LI
Password [ 0]
ARCA II
AG
SEARCHING ARCAII
* MAIN MENU *
> 1.Present
_T
2.MT functions
ER
ARCAII Tree
IN
* MAIN MENU *
> 1.Present *1. PRESENT *
2.MT functions > 1.Control (0)
RD
2.(R)Extensions
3.Autodialler
GA
Ver UN:1.0
UN 1.0 TM:1.00
TM:0.10
(12: 4:10)( 3/10/04)
Enter Password:
* MT MENU * Clave
Password [[ 0] 0]
Y_
> 1.Calculator
2.MT clock
3.Monitor * ARCA II CONTROL *
ON
> 1-faults
2-hystoric
3-variables
TH
AN
4. OPERATING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

The information contained in the Configuration Tool is distributed in a structure of menus and
submenus grouped together in accordance with their function and contents at different levels.
Normally, the last submenu of a specific branch contains a dialogue menu in which it is
possible to display and/or edit variables and parameters of the Configuration Tool. Access and
movement through the tree is detailed below:

4.1. Moving through the Configuration Tool menus
A menu display screen may be as follows:
Numeration of the menu

(each level separated by
12
Name of the higher submenu
one point)
12
Cursor position: *5.3. VERTICAL MOV * List of submenus
Pointing to a submenu
1-type acc.
20
2-speeds
3-times
G_
In order to move through the submenus, use the following keys:
: Moves the cursor which points at a submenu one line upwards.
IN
: Moves the cursor which points at a submenu one line downwards.
FT
: Moves the cursor which points to a submenu one page (three lines) upwards.
LI
: Moves the cursor which points to a submenu one page (three lines)
downwards.
AG
: Provides access to the menu immediately above (except on the upper level).
_T
: Provides access to the menu pointed to by the cursor .

ER
4.2. Movement through a dialogue menu

IN
A dialogue menu display screen may be as follows:

RD
Numeration of the menu

(each level separated by Name of the submenu in which
one point) the variables or parameters are
located
GA
*3.1. GENERALES * Values of the variables or

parametros
Mode NORMAL)
Y_
Fault (NO)
ON
Identification name of the Position of the cursor:

variable or parameter pointing to the value of a
variable or parameter
TH
NOTE: There are two kinds of general data fields:

AN
Variables: Their values are written between brackets (). Their value cannot be edited (read
only).
Parameters: Their values are written between square brackets []. Their value can be edited
(writing/reading).
In order to move through a dialogue menu, use the following keys:

: Positions the cursor on the first line of the menu (only for menus that do no
include submenus).
: Positions the cursor on the last line of the menu (only for menus that do not
include submenus).
12
: Moves the cursor which points to a variable or parameter one line upwards.
12
: Moves the cursor which points to a variable or parameter one line downwards.
20
: Moves the cursor which points to a variable or parameter one position to the
left.
G_
: Moves the cursor which points to a variable or parameter one position to the
right.
IN
: Removes the label of the submenu on the first line, increasing to 4 the number
FT
of lines available for displaying variables and parameters. The label reappears when
key is pressed again.
LI
: Moves the cursor which points to a variable or parameter one page (three
lines) upwards.
AG
: Moves the cursor which points to a variable or parameter one page (three
lines) downwards.
_T
: Provides access to the menu immediately above (leaves dialogue menu).

ER
: Provides access to the edition of the parameter value pointed at by the cursor

IN
4.3. Editing a parameter value

RD
There are three basic types of parameters in the parameter list:

GA
Numerical: allow a decimal number as input.
Parameters which represent a time unit as shown with a letter which indicates the time base.
Y_
Examples:
Delay P36 [ ]C : Time base in hundredths of a second C
ON
Car Call [ ]D : Time base in tenths of a second D

Max Levelling [ ]S : Time base in seconds S
TH
T_car_light [ ]M : Time base in minutes M

S. Insp. .[ ]N : Speed in cm/s N
AN
In parameters or variables which represent distances, the unit represents millimetres, except
for those stated in encoder pulses p.
In speed parameters, the unit is in cm/sec C.

List: allow a value within a default value list.

Alphanumerical: allow both figures and letters.
Once the cursor (flashing) is placed within the editing field of a parameter, the process for
editing parameters with the keyboard is as follows:
12
and : In the case of a list type parameter, change the values between the
possible default parameters.
12
: In the case of a numerical parameter, enter the digits with the required
to
20
value.
al : In the case of an alphanumerical parameter, enter the digits with the
G_
required value. Staying with the selected key pressed the AV_PAG and RE_PAG
IN
allow to change between the different characters associated to that key. Le '-'
(minus) sign is on the '1' key.
FT
: In the case of a numerical parameter, deletes the last digit entered.
LI
: Leaves the editing field without modifying the value of the parameter.
AG
: Sends the value entered in the controller. If the piece of data entered is
correct, this is displayed in the editing field, otherwise the initial value is displayed (a
_T
new valid value must be entered).
Modification of a parameter is only possible if the car is at rest. In order for the modified parameter(s)
ER
to remain after a power cut, the function [Store Param.] in menu 4.2.1 Store parameters must be
activated.
IN
4.4. Descriptive format of CT menus in this document

RD
All the menus displayed on the CT screen consist of several read or write fields surrounded by

GA
text. By pressing the keys , the user can move the cursor from one
field to another. The next section Examples shows a typical description of the so-called
Speed menu. This is a real menu of the CT. Various fields will be found.
Y_
A description of the different parts of a menu is given in the table below:

Fields on the screen
ON
Screen No. Marks Possible values Description

This field reproduces Number of Icons indicating some This field identifies the unit used This field describes the
TH
the content of the CT the field of the characteristics for the parameter/variable and associated variable in
menu as it would appear being of the field. These are its possible values. It sometimes detail.
on the display if there described. examples of such contains information on each
were enough lines to icons: value.
AN
view it completely. The

fields in blue and with denotes a field
square brackets are continually updated
every half a second.
writable whereas the
fields in orange and
with brackets are read
denotes a read only
field.
only fields. At times,
due to space limits,
symbols : and = are
denotes a field in


used instead of [] () binary format.
but they have the same
meaning. denotes a field in
hexadecimal format.
12
denotes that it is
necessary to push
the VALIDAR key to
12
start the function
execution. Once the
function has
20
finished the result is
shown at the
screen.
G_
The following section shows an example of how one of the menus would look like.
4.5. Example - Speeds
IN
This commented example alludes to how a menu generally works and how it can be managed.
FT
Description of the display
Screen No. Marks Possible values
LI Description
AG
*5.3.2. VELOCITIES* 1 Unit:[cm/s] Rated speed: The parameters listed in Appendix
Nominal Veloc [ 1]n 350 maximum speed A1 of the Positioning Norm are associated with
this parameter.
Vmax [ 2]n 250
_T
V3( 3) Value[ 4]n 200

V2( 5) Value[ 6]n 160 rated speed
ER
V1( 7) Value[ 8]n 100

VInsp [ 9]n 70 recommended minimum
speed. Lower speeds should
V00[10] Value[ 11]n be used only when testing
IN
the lift installation.

V0 [ 12]n 60
RD
Acceleration ( 13) 50
Jerk ( 14) 40
25
GA
2 Unit:[cm/s] Maximum service speed.
3 NO Validates speed level V3. This field is continually

updated every 0.5 seconds.
Y_
YES
4 Unit:[cm/s] Speed V3
NO Validates speed level V2. This field is continually

ON
5 YES updated every 0.5 seconds.
TH
7 NO Validates speed level V1. This field is continually

YES updated every 0.5 seconds.
AN
9 Unit:[cm/s] Inspection Speed
10 NO Validates the speed level.

YES
11 Unit:[cm/s] Speed
12 Unit:[cm/s] Speed


13 Value of start acceleration. This is a read only
field..
14 Value of jerk during starting (inoperative).

12
NOTE: Sporadically, notes can be added at the foot of a menu to provide important information or
12
warning about the menu. They are highlighted to draw the readers attention.
20
G_
IN
FT
LI
AG
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

5. Device CT
CT node
12
5.1. Table of menus of CT
12
Main menu of the Configuration Tool.
1 PRESENT
20
Displays all the nodes present in the CAN bus. Wait for 5 seconds to view all the nodes
present.
G_
2 CT FUNCTIONS
IN
Functions specific to the Configuration Tool CT.
FT
2.2 CT CLOCK
Setting the time of the Configuration Tool. Persists even if the CT is switched off.
Description of the screen
Screen Fields of the screen
LI
AG
No. Mark Possible Values Description
*2.2. CT CLOCK * 1 Part identifying the date.
Date [1]
_T
Time [2] 2 Part identifying the time.

2.3 MONITOR
ER
Utilities for monitoring communications.

2.6 SMART MEDIA
IN
Functions related to the removable memory card. Permits using program and parameter files.
2.6.1 IDENTIFICATION
RD
Identification of the memory card. The name is as previously allocated during the formatting of
the card.
GA

Y_

*2.6.1. IDENTIFICAT* 1 Name to identify the Smart Media.
Name (1)
ON
Size (2) 2 Size, in physical bytes, of the Smart Media

Num.Sectors (3)
Pages/sector (4) 3 Number of sectors of Smart Media

TH
Bytes/page (5)
Num.Inputs (6) 4 Pages per sector of the Smart Media that is being used.
Free kB (7)

Number of bytes per page of the Smart Media. The total
AN
5 size of the Smart Media is [Number of pages] x

[sectors/page] x [bytes/sector]
6 Number of physical inputs that can be considered as files.
Usually it can reach 120 files per Smarmed card.
7 Number of free kilobytes on the Smart Media.


Device CT
2.6.2 FORMAT
Format the memory card. WARNING! All stored information will be lost.
12
*2.6.2. FORMAT * 1 Name of Smart Media to put during the format process.
Name [1] This name will allow to identify it from another Smart
12
Media cards directly.
Format [2]
2 To format Smart Media card push . Push again
20
to confirm the process.
Warning: This operation maybe could take 10 seconds per
G_
32 Mb.
2.6.3 EXPLORER
IN
To view the list of the files present in the memory card.
2.6.3.1 INFORMATION
FT
Displays additional information on a file.
No. Mark Possible Values
LI Description
AG
*2.6.3.1. INFORMATI* 1 Exclusive identification number of file on Smart Medias
ID Input (1) file system. Smart Medias file system put this number
Name [2] automatically.
Size (3)
_T
2 Range: 1..0 File's name. At least it must be one character. Files can
Date (4) have the same name but they can always be distinguished
Time (5) by their ID input.
Type (6)
ER
3 Accurate size of file in bytes.

Origin (7)
Destina(8) File creation date.
Version (9)
4
IN
CRC (10) File creation time.

5
Flags (11)
Note [12] 6 File type.

RD
7 Original device whom created this file

8 Target device.

GA
9 Destination version. Example: ARCA II controller is version

0 and M34 ARCA II Controller is version 1
Y_
10 Cyclic Redundancy Check to check the file is not

corrupted.
11 File attributes +1:Read only, +2:Hidden, +4:Encrypted,

ON
+32:Signed, +64:Inscrutable
12 Comment about file.
TH
2.6.3.2 DELETE FILE

Deletes one file from the card memory.
AN
2.6.3.3 TRANSFER FILE

Transfers one file from the memory card to the selected device.

Device CT

*2.6.3.3. TRANSFER * 1 Number of target node to which this file is oriented.
Node(1) IDFil(2)
Exclusive identification number of file to download.
12
File (3) 2
Transfer? [4]
3 Name of file to download.

12
4 This button allows to download this file immediately.

2.6.3.4 VIEW FILE
20
Displays the content of the selected memory card file.
2.6.3.5 VERIFY
G_
Verifies that this file into card memory is valid.
2.6.4 REPAIR
IN
Verify that all Smart Media is correct. Check defective sectors and mark them to be controlled
FT
2.8 SET UP
To view or set up the CT's internal variables.
2.8.1 ABOUT CT LI
Displays the CT's REGISTRATION nr. and the hardware and software versions.
AG
_T

*2.8.1. ABOUT CT * 1 Maximum: 28 characters Copyright
N 1
ER
Soft :2 2 CT software version

Hard :3
Regis. :4 3 CT hardware version
Language [5]

IN
4 Maximum: 12 characters Special variable enabling the CT registration nr. to be

stated as a text string
5 Number of the active language of CT
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

Device CT
6. Device Control
Node of ARCA II control type
12
6.1. Table of menus of Control
12
Main controller
1 FAULTS
20
Shows all the faults
G_
1.1 LAST FAULT
IN
FT
*1.1. LAST FAULT * 1 Latest failure
Fault.Nr.0 (1)
Anom.Nr.0
Fault.Nr.1
Anom.Nr.1
(2)
(3)
(4)
2
3
LI Latest anomaly
Identifier for penultimate fault

AG
4 Identifier for penultimate anomaly

1.2 FAULTS LIST
_T
Faults list
ER

IN
*1.2. FAULTS LIST * 1 Fault Identifier.

0)(1)... (2)
ON, OFF Current alarm status (ON:1 or OFF:0).
RD
1)()... () 2
2)()... ()
1.2.1 FAULT NAME
GA
Menus with fault details

Y_

ON
*1.2.1. (n)-XXXXXXX* 1 Maximum: 12 characters Information on the control's condition when the fault
Xtra Info.(1) occurred.. Denotes a datum associated with the fault:
Started (2) Input, etc.
TH
(3) Date the fault started. Part identifying the time .

2
Ended (4)
(5) 3 Date the fault started. Part identifying the date.

AN
Mode (6)
DZ(7) Gen.(8) 4 Date the fault ends. Part identifying the time .
PI-Act: CB(9)CS(10)
Logic Pos (11) 5 Date the fault ends. Part identifying the date.


Device Control

fms_mv (12) 6 INSPECTION Information on the control's condition when the fault
fms_pu (13) NORMAL occurred.. Mode.
PI-Start: CB(14)(15)
FIREMEN
Start sp (16)
12
Direction (17) EMERGENCY
Delete? [18] GENERATOR
URG_CANCEL
12
DOOR BLOCKED
WATER_PIT
NON_URG_CANCEL
20
AUX RESC
PRI CAR
G_
EVACUA
GEN SHUTDOWN
VIP
IN
REENV.TLSV
FIRE
7 NO, YES Information on the control's condition when the fault
FT
occurred.. Indicates whether the car was in the door zone
when the failure occurred.
LI
occurred.. Indicates whether the generator was on when
the failure occurred.
9 Information on the control's condition Position of counter

AG
CB..
CS..
_T
11 Information on the control's condition when the fault

occurred.. Logic position when the failure occurred.

ER
occurred.. Status of the vertical drive PLC when the failure

occurred..

IN
occurred.. Status of the door PLC, when the failure

occurred..

RD
CB..
CS..
GA
16 VNULL: Information on the control's condition when the fault

V00 occurred.. Speed level at last start.
V0
Y_
VINSP
V1
ON
V2
V3
VMAX
TH
17 UP, DOWN, NONE Information on the control's condition when the fault
occurred.. Travel direction at last start.
18 NO, YES This command erases a fault when put right
AN
This menu is displayed only in controls with positioning type II.

1.2.2 FAULT NAME

Device Control

Xtra Info (1) occurred.. Denotes a datum associated with the fault:
Input, etc.
12
Started (2)
2
Ended (4)
12
Mode (6)
DZ(7) Gen.Act(8) 4 Date the fault ends. Part identifying the time .
PII/III-Act.(9)
20
fms_mv (11)
fms_pu (12) 6 INSPECTION Information on the control's condition when the fault
occurred.. Mode.
G_
PII/III-Star(13) NORMAL
Start sp. (14) FIREMEN
Direction (15)
Delete? [16] EMERGENCY
IN
GENERATOR
URG_CANCEL
DOOR BLOCKED
FT
WATER_PIT
NON_URG_CANCEL
AUX RESC
PRI CAR
EVACUA
LI
AG
GEN SHUTDOWN
VIP
REENV.TLSV
_T
FIRE
ER

IN

CB..
RD


GA

occurred..

Y_

occurred..

ON
CB..
TH
V0
VINSP
V1
AN
V2
V3
VMAX

Device Control

12
This menu is displayed only in controls with positioning type I.
1.3 ANOMAL.LIST
12
List of all the anomalies
20
G_
*1.3. ANOMAL.LIST * 1 Fault Identifier.
0)(1)... (2)
1)()... () 2 ON, OFF Current alarm status (ON:1 or OFF:0).
2)()... ()
IN
3)()... ()
1.3.1 ANOMALY NAME
FT
Menus with detailed anomaly. The anomaly menus are identical to the faults menus.
1.3.2 FAULT NAME
LI
AG
1.4 SYSTEM FAULTS
_T
List of system faults.

ER

IN
*1.4. SYSTEM FAULTS* 1 Fault Identifier.

0)(1)... (2)
2 ON, OFF Current alarm status (ON:1 or OFF:0).
RD

1.4.1 FAULT NAME
GA

Y_

ON
Xtra Info.(1) occurred.. Denotes a datum associated with the fault:
Started (2) Input, etc.
(3)
TH
2 Date the fault started. Part identifying the time .

Ended (4)
Mode (6)
AN
DZ(7) Gen.(8) 4 Date the fault ends. Part identifying the time .
PI-Act: CB(9)CS(10)


Device Control

fms_mv (12) 6 INSPECTION Information on the control's condition when the fault
fms_pu (13) NORMAL occurred.. Mode.
PI-Start: CB(14)(15)
FIREMEN
Start sp (16)
12
Direction (17) EMERGENCY
Delete? [18] GENERATOR
URG_CANCEL
12
DOOR BLOCKED
WATER_PIT
NON_URG_CANCEL
20
AUX RESC
PRI CAR
G_
EVACUA
GEN SHUTDOWN
VIP
IN
REENV.TLSV
FIRE
FT
LI

AG
CB..
CS..
_T


ER

occurred..

IN

occurred..

RD
CB..
CS..
GA

V0
Y_
VINSP
V1
ON
V2
V3
VMAX
TH
AN

1.4.2 FAULT NAME

Device Control

Xtra Info (1) occurred.. Denotes a datum associated with the fault:
Input, etc.
12
Started (2)
2
Ended (4)
12
Mode (6)
DZ(7) Gen.Act(8) 4 Date the fault ends. Part identifying the time .
PII/III-Act.(9)
20
fms_mv (11)
fms_pu (12) 6 INSPECTION Information on the control's condition when the fault
occurred.. Mode.
G_
PII/III-Star(13) NORMAL
Start sp. (14) FIREMEN
Direction (15)
Delete? [16] EMERGENCY
IN
GENERATOR
URG_CANCEL
DOOR BLOCKED
FT
WATER_PIT
NON_URG_CANCEL
AUX RESC
PRI CAR
EVACUA
LI
AG
GEN SHUTDOWN
VIP
REENV.TLSV
_T
FIRE
ER

IN

CB..
RD


GA

occurred..

Y_

occurred..

ON
CB..
TH
V0
VINSP
V1
AN
V2
V3
VMAX

Device Control

12
1.5 FAULT RECOV.
12
It tries to recover the memorised faults.
20
G_
*1.5. FAULT RECOV. * 1 NO, YES This command activates the recovery of stored type faults
Select Yes
and press Confir[1]
IN
1.6 DELETE LIST
It deletes the fault list.
FT
*1.6. DELETE LIST *

No.
1
Mark
NO, YES
LI
Possible Values Description
This command serves to erase already recovered faults
Select Yes and anomalies
AG
and press Confir[1]
_T
2 HYSTORIC
ER
Historical data of the lift.
2.1 PARTIAL TIMES

IN
Partial times
RD

GA
*2.1. PARTIAL TIMES* 1 Part identifying the date.

F.inicio (1)
(2) 2 Part identifying the time .

Y_
SM.(3)D(4)H(5)m
ST.(6)D(7)H(8)m 3 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the days.
AV.(9)D(10)H(11)m

ON
RE.(12)D(13)H(14)m 4 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the hours.

MA.(15)D(16)H(17)m

5 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the minutes.

TH
6 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the days.

7 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the hours.

AN




Device Control



12


12


20

G_
2.2 TOTAL TIMES
Total times
IN
FT
*2.2. TOTAL TIMES * 1 Part identifying the date.
F.inicio (1) LI
(2) 2 Part identifying the time .
SM.(3)D(4)H(5)m
ST.(6)D(7)H(8)m 3 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the days.
AG
AV.(9)D(10)H(11)m

RE.(12)D(13)H(14)m 4 Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the hours.
MA.(15)D(16)H(17)m

_T


ER


IN

RD


GA


Y_


ON

Counter of the historic timer. Part identifying the minutes.
TH
17
2.3 PARTIAL STAT.
AN
Partial statistics

Device Control

*2.3. PARTIAL STAT.* 1 Number of starts since the started date (partial statistics)
No.P.Arra. (1)
No.P.Apert.(2) 2 Number of door openings since init date (partial statistics)
No.P.Anom. (3)
12
No.P.Ave. (4) 3 Number of anomalies since the started date (partial
No.P.Arra.S(5)
statistics)
No.P.Arra.B(6) 4 Number of faults since the started date (partial statistics)

12
5
6
20

2.4 TOTAL STAT.
G_
Total statistics
IN
FT
*2.4. TOTAL STAT. * 1 Number of starts since the started date (total statistics)
No.T.Arra. (1)
No.T.Apert.(2) 2 Number of door openings since init date (total statistics)
No.T.Anom. (3) LI
No.T.Ave. (4) 3 Number of anomalies since the started date (total
No.T.Arra.S(5)
statistics)
AG
No.T.Arra.B(6) 4 Number of faults since the started date (partial statistics)

5
_T
6
ER
2.5 PARTIAL ERASURE

Partial erasure
IN

RD

*2.5. PARTIAL ERASU* 1 NO, YES Command to reset partial historic timer
Borr.datos parc.[1]
GA
2.6 TOTAL ERASURE

Y_
Total erasure
ON

TH
*2.6. TOTAL ERASURE* 1 NO, YES Command to reset total historic timer
Borr.datos tot.?[1]
AN
3 VARIABLES
It shows the values of the internal variables of the controller. It is just possible to read values,
not to modify them.

Device Control
3.1 GENERAL
General variables of the controller.
12
*3.1. GENERAL * 1 INSPECTION Operating mode: INSPECTION, EMERGENCY, FIREMEN,
Mode (1) NORMAL EVACUATION (rescue), WATER IN PIT, DOOR BLOCKED,
12
Fault (2) PRI CAR (car priority), URG_CANCEL (urgent cancellation),
FIREMEN NON_URG_CANCEL (non urgent cancellation),
Num.Pres.Faul. (3)
Anomaly (4) EMERGENCY GENERATOR, VIP, NORMAL, REENV.TLSV (home landing
Num.Pres.An. (5) GENERATOR provoked by the autodialler), FIRE (EN81-73).
20
Direct (6) URG_CANCEL The Emergency mode is activated by means of switch
Out of Serv (7) BMCM and with parameter 'Assembly mode' of menu 7
DOOR BLOCKED
All out of Serv (8) activated.
G_
Speed level (9) WATER_PIT
The DOOR BLOCKED mode is activated through the 'Door
StartToRope(10) NON_URG_CANCEL blocked' command of menu 4.3.1.
Tot.Num.Sta(11) AUX RESC
IN
Dis.Car Calls (12)
PRI CAR
Id.Out of
S.[13((14) EVACUA
Id.CarCall_Dis[(16( GEN SHUTDOWN
FT
16) VIP
REENV.TLSV
2
FIRE
NO, YES
LI
(YES) The control is in a failure condition.
AG
3 Number of present faults

4 NO, YES (YES) The control is in an anomaly condition.

_T
5 Number of presently registered anomalies.

6 UP, DOWN, NONE Car directional system status. (NONE, UP, DOWN)

ER
7 NO, YES Out of service. (YES) Lift in any mode other than the
normal or failure mode. The lift does not answer landing
calls. The FS LED on the CPU board is on
IN
8 NO, YES All out of service. (YES) All the lifts in a traffic group have
their out of service switch on. No landing calls are
registered. The FST LED on the CPU board is on.
RD
9 VNULL: Speed level of vertical movement.

V00 NUL: No speed level
V0 VMAX: Maximum speed.
GA
VINSP V0: Levelling speed.

V1 VINSP: Inspection speed (variable drives).
Y_
V2 V1: Intermediate speed 1 (variable drives).

VMAX V3: Intermediate speed 3 (variable drives).
ON
V00: Inching speed (variable drives)

10 Number of change direction of starts left to failure 326
FA_CHANGE_ROPE.
TH
11 Total number of starts.

12 NO, YES (YES). Car calls cannot be registered.

AN
13 Index for the out of service.

14 NO, YES For the given index, indicates if the cabin is out of service.
Each index means a different cause of the out of service.
15 Index for the cabins calls inhibition.

Device Control

16 NO, YES For the given index, indicates whether it is possible or not
to do cabins calls. Each index means a different cause of
the cabins calls inhibition.
12
3.2 VERTICAL MOV.
Variables related to the vertical movement: speeds, etc.
12
3.2.1 INSTANT. VAR.
Instantaneous refresh variables
20
G_
*3.2.1. INSTANT. VA* 1 RECOVERY Type of car movement:
Type Mov(1) FLOOR TO FLOOR RECOVERY: Travel to recover the position of the lift from
IN
Direction (2) a position out of the door zone.
ZEROING
Speed level (3)
L.WELL EXPLOR FLOOR TO FLOOR: Movement between two floors.
Speed>03 (4)
ZEROING: Movement to the bottom floor to recover the
FT
Car Statu(5) INSPEC
fms mv (6) position reference.
EMERGENCY
Gen. Active (7) L.WELL EXPLOR: Travel from the bottom level to the top
LEVELLING_DO_F level to learn the position of the magnets.
Speed (8)
LEVELLING_DO_N
LEVELLING_DC_F
LI INSPEC: Movement made by the inspection box.
EMERGENCY: Movement made by the Emergency
LEVELLING_DC_N pushbutton station in the machine room.
AG
LOWER LEVEL HYDR LEVELLING_DO_F: Movement to level the cabin with
RESCUE doors open from a position inside the door zone
LEVELLING_DO_N: Movement to level the cabin with
_T
RESCUE_REG
doors open from a position inside the door zone
TEST BOARD
LEVELLING_DC_F: Movement to level the cabin with doors
close from a position inside the door zone
ER
LEVELLING_DC_N: Movement to level the cabin with

doors close from a position inside the door zone
LOWER LEVEL HYDR: Travel to the bottom floor to park a
IN
hydraulic lift in case of faults.

RESCUE: Travel to the nearest floor made by the rescue
system because of power problems.
RD
RESCUE_REG: Travel to the nearest floor made by the

rescue system because of power problems.
2 UP, DOWN, NONE Direction of car movement: UP; DOWN; NONE

GA
3 VNULL: Speed level of vertical movement.

V00 NUL: No speed level
Y_
V0 VMAX: Maximum speed.

VINSP V0: Levelling speed.
V1 VINSP: Inspection speed (variable drives).
ON

TH
VMAX V3: Intermediate speed 3 (variable drives).

V00: Inching speed (variable drives)
4 NO, YES (YES): Indicates that speed is greater than 0.3m/s.

AN
5 IDLE, RUN_DC, Car running status. RUN_DC (Travelling with door closed);
RUN_DO RUN_DA (Travelling with door open); IDLE
6 Value of the vertical movement PLC status

7 NO, YES (YES) Generator in operation

Device Control

8 Car speed

3.3 DOOR MOV.
12
Variables related to the door movement.
12
20
*3.3. DOOR MOV. * 1 OPEN, CLOSED, NULL Indicates the enabled door status during parking.
Park w/Door (1) OPE(open); CLO (closed); NUL (none)
fms pu (2) Value of the door PLC status
2
Local.Reopen.Per(3)
G_
Loc.Mec.Reop.Per(4) 3 NO, YES EXT 3:. IR Permission. Fictitious output.

4 NO, YES EXT 3:. IRM Permission. Fictitious output.
IN

3.4 POSITIONING
FT
Variables related to the positioning system.
3.4.1 DATA
Data of the positioning system. LI
AG
_T
*3.4.1. DATA * 1 With the car at rest:

Logic Position (1) In the door zone: this is the floor the car is parked at.
Door Zone (2)
Outside the door zone: In position system 1, this is the
(3)
ER
Pos Ref.
lower floor and in position system 2, the nearest floor.
L.well Data (4)
With the car in motion: the nearest floor where levelling is
possible.
IN
The logic position of the lower terminal floor is 0, except

for asymmetric multiplex lifts where said position coincides
with the value of parameter Bottom Floor 5.1.1
RD
2 NO, YES (YES): Indicates that the car is in the door zone

3 NO, YES (YES): Shows that the system knows the car position

GA
4 NO, YES [YES]: Indicates whether the lift well exploration was
completed correctly
Y_
3.4.2 SWITCHES
Variables to show the status of switches or sensors of positioning system.
ON
The variables which depend on parameters(CO and CU) are taken from the entry
corresponding to current parameterization.
TH

AN
*3.4.2. SWITCHES * 1 OFF, ON CS Sensor

CS CB CO CU
(1) (2) (3) (4) 2 OFF, ON CB Sensor
FCH CEHI

(5)(6) 3 State of the C0 sensor. Depending on the '5.4.1. Reading
FCI FCIS
C0CU' parameter the Extension 4 input or the Main Board
input is displayed.

Device Control

(7)(8) 4 State of the CU sensor. Depending on the '5.4.1. Reading
C0CU' parameter the Extension 4 input or the Main Board
input is displayed.
5 OFF, ON PBCM.
12

6 OFF, ON PBCM.

12
7 State of FCI. The associated physical input depends of the
type of vertical drive.
8 State of FCIS. The associated physical input depends of

20
the type of vertical drive.
3.4.3 TYPE I
G_
With car levelled at lower terminal floor, the value of both counters is 1.
In up direction, both when approaching and leaving the magnet, the relevant counter
increases.
IN
In down direction, the counter decreases in a similar way.
FT
*3.4.3. TYPE I
Counter CS
*
(1)
1 LI This is the value of zone counter CS in positioning type I.
It gives information on the car position
Counter CB (2) This is the value of zone counter CB in positioning type I.
2
AG
It gives information on the car position
_T
With car levelled at lower terminal floor, the value of both counters is 1.
In up direction, both when approaching and leaving the magnet, the relevant counter
ER
increases.
In down direction, the counter decreases in a similar way.
3.4.4 TYPE II, III
IN
Data of the positioning types II and III (with encoder on the speed governor).
3.4.4.1 POSI.VARIABLES
RD
Variables of the positioning types II and III.

GA

Y_
*3.4.4.1. POSI.VARI* 1 This is the absolute car position in position system 2.

Actual P(1) At the upper edge of magnet CB at the lower terminal
(2)
ON
Error_CS floor, it is 2000mm

Error_CB (3)
2 Type II: This is the positional deviation between the place
Error_CO (4) where the lift stopped running up and the position of this
Error_CU (5)
TH
place as saved during the lift well exploration.

Dis.Lev.Pt.(6)p
Type III: This is the positional deviation between the
place where CSB was detected while running up and the
position of this place as saved during the lift well
AN
exploration.

Device Control

3 Type II: This is the positional deviation between the place
where the lift stopped running down and the position of
this place as saved during the lift well exploration.
Type III: This is the positional deviation between the
12
place where CSB was detected while running down and
the position of this place as saved during the lift well
exploration.
12
4 This is the difference between the position of change-over
point CO and the position of this point as saved during the
lift well exploration
20
5 This is the difference between the position of change-over
point CU and the position of this point as saved during the
lift well exploration
G_
6 Units: [pulses] This is the distance (in pulses) from the position where
the car stopped in a floor-to-floor journey to the levelling
point.
IN
Positive value: the car overran the levelling point
Negative value: the car did not overrun the levelling point.
3.4.4.2 WELL EXPLOR.DATA
FT
Information of the position of the magnets taken during the learning of the shaft.
3.4.4.2.1 SUNDRIES LI
AG
_T
*3.4.4.2.1. SUNDRIE* 1 This is the distance between the terminal floors' levelling
Travel (1) points.
Pos_CO (2)
ER
2 Position of switching point of switch CO.

Pos_CU (3)
DistRealFCI (4) 3 Position of switching point of switch CU.
DistRealFCIS(5)
IN
4
5
RD
3.4.4.2.2 STOP POINTS

GA
Stopping levels.
Y_

*3.4.4.2.2. STOP PO* 1 Type II: CS screen detection on ascent. Stop points on

ON
Level 0 CS(1) ascent.

CB(2) Type III: CSB screen detection on ascent..
Level 1 CS()
2 Type II: CB screen detection on descent. Stop points on
TH
CB() descent.
Level 2 CS()
CB() Type III: CSB screen detection on descent.
AN
...
Level 63 CS()
CB()
3.4.5 MAGNETS
Data associated to the positioning magnets.

Device Control

*3.4.5. MAGNETS * 1 During a lift well exploration, it counts the number of
Magnets CS in CU(1) magnets CS (Type II) / CSB (Type III) within zone CU
12
Magnets CB in CO(2) During the lift zeroing process, it counts the number of
2 magnets CB (Type II) / CSB (Type III) within zone CO
3.5 CABINET
12
Variables related to the main board.
3.5.1 I/O PBCM 1 TO 10
20
Inputs and outputs of the main board
G_
The function of each input depends on the drive.
Ei: Inputs
IN
Si: Outputs
FT
*3.5.1. I/O PBCM 1 * PBCM.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
9
0
A
1
2

LI PBCM.
SB C D E F G H I J K
AG
3 PBCM.

4 PBCM.

_T
5 PBCM.

6 PBCM.

ER
7 PBCM.

PBCM.
IN
8
9 PBCM.

RD
A PBCM.

B PBCM. S0.

GA
C PBCM. S1.

D PBCM. S2.

Y_
E PBCM. S3.

ON
F PBCM. S4.

G PBCM. S5.

TH
H PBCM. S6.

I PBCM. S7.

AN
J PBCM. S3.

K PBCM. S2.


Device Control
3.5.2 GENERIC I/O

Several inputs of the main board: safety circuit, emergency pushbutton station, position
captors, etc.
12
*3.5.2. GENERIC I/O* 1 OFF, ON PBCM.

12
P32 P35 P36
(1) (2) (3) 2 OFF, ON PBCM.
BMCM BSCM BDCM

OFF, ON PBCM.
20
(4) (5) (6) 3
CS CB CO CU
(7) (8) (9) (10) 4 OFF, ON PBCM.
ECEM SCEM

G_
5 OFF, ON PBCM.
(11) (12)
P38A P39A

6 OFF, ON PBCM.
(13) (14)
IN
7 OFF, ON PBCM.

8 OFF, ON PBCM.

FT
9 OFF, ON PBCM.

10
11

OFF, ON
OFF, ON
LI PBCM.
PBCM.
AG
12 OFF, ON PBCM. S2.

13
_T
14
ER
3.5.3 I/O MOV. DOOR OP

Status of the variables related to the vertical movement with open doors.
IN

RD
*3.5.3. I/O MOV. DO* 1 OFF, ON PBCM.

EA EB EC EPS
PBCM.
GA
(1)(2)(3)(4) 2 OFF, ON
SPS SCC

(5)(6) 3 OFF, ON PBCM.

Y_
4 OFF, ON PBCM.

5 OFF, ON PBCM. S0.

ON
6 OFF, ON PBCM. S1.

TH
3.6 CAR
Variables related to the cabin.
AN
3.6.1 COP CAR 1

Variables of the COP1.
3.6.1.1 VARIABLES CAR 1

General variables of the COP1.

Device Control

*3.6.1.1. VARIABLES* 1 OFF, ON Doors opening pushbutton.
AP CP IAE
OFF, ON Doors closing pushbutton.
12
(1) (2) (3) 2
IN IAC IM

(4) (5) (6) 3 OFF, ON Switch for disabling external calls.
PV LV PIP LIP

12
(7) (8) (9) (10) 4 OFF, ON Disable of zone annulation function.
IAB LIAB LSC CRC

5 OFF, ON Disable of landing and car calls.
(11) (12) (13) (14)
20
6 OFF, ON Cancel car calls.

7 OFF, ON Fan pushbutton.

G_
8 OFF, ON Fan output.

IN
9 OFF, ON Partial lighting input.

10 OFF, ON Partial lighting output.

FT
11 OFF, ON Fireman switch.

12 OFF, ON Fireman's light.

13 OFF, ON
LI Overload output.
14 OFF, ON Pushbutton audio feedback.

AG
3.6.1.2 CALL PUSHBUTTONS

_T
Car calls for each level (logic position). Depending on the variable 'Floor x 10' can be selected
the ten pushes to check.
ER

IN

*3.6.1.2. CALL PUSH* 1 Range: 0..6 . For example: Floor x 10' = 0: Floors 0 to 9; 'Floor x 10'
Floors by10[1] = 1: Floors 10 to 19 and s. o.
RD
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EXT 2:. Input E4.

2
E2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B
SC D E F G H I J K L 3 EXT 2:. Input E5.

GA
4 EXT 2:. Input E6.

Y_
5 EXT 2:. Input E7.

6 EXT 2:. Input E8.

ON
7 EXT 2:. Input E9.

8 EXT 2:. Input E10.

TH
9 EXT 2:. Input E1.

A EXT 2:. Input E2.

AN
B EXT 2:. Input E3.

C EXT 2:. Output S4.

D EXT 2:. Output S5.


Device Control

E EXT 2:. Output S6.

F EXT 2:. Output S7.

12
G EXT 2:. Output S8.

H EXT 2:. Output S9.

12
I EXT 2:. Output S10.

J EXT 2:. Output S1.

20
K EXT 2:. Output S2.

EXT 2:. Output S3.
G_
L
3.6.1.3 I/O EXT2 CAR 1
IN
Status of the inputs and outputs of the Extensions 2 of the COP1.
FT
*3.6.1.3. I/O EXT2
Ext2[1]
* 1 Range: 0..7
LI Number of extension 2 (0 to 7) to visualize. Showed
Extension's index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
AG
2 EXT 2:. Input E1.
E2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B

_T
4 EXT 2:. Input E3.

5 EXT 2:. Input E4.

ER
6 EXT 2:. Input E5.

7 EXT 2:. Input E6.

IN
8 EXT 2:. Input E7.

RD
9 EXT 2:. Input E8.

A EXT 2:. Input E9.

GA
B EXT 2:. Input E10.


Y_

ON


TH


AN



L EXT 2:. Output S10.

Device Control
3.6.2 COP CAR 2

Variables of the COP2.
3.6.2.1 VARIABLES CAR 2
12
General variables of the COP2.
12
20
*3.6.2.1. VARIABLES* 1 OFF, ON Doors opening pushbutton.
AP CP IAE
(1) (2) (3) 2 OFF, ON Doors closing pushbutton.
IN IAC IM

G_
(4) (5) (6) 3 OFF, ON Switch for disabling external calls.
PV LV PIP LIP

(7) (8) (9) (10) 4 OFF, ON Disable of zone annulation function.

IN
IAB LIAB LSC CRC
5 OFF, ON Disable of landing a car calls.
(11) (12) (13) (14)
6 OFF, ON Cancel car calls.

FT
7 OFF, ON Fan pushbutton.

8
9
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
LI Fan output.
Partial lighting input.

AG
10 OFF, ON Partial lighting output.

11 OFF, ON Fireman switch.

_T
12 OFF, ON Fireman's light.

13 OFF, ON Overload output.

ER
14 OFF, ON Pushbutton audio feedback.

IN
3.6.2.2 CALL PUSHBUTTONS

Car calls for each level (logic position). Depending on the variable 'Floor x 10' can be selected
RD
the ten pushes to check.

GA

Y_
*3.6.2.2. CALL PUSH* 1 Range: 0..6 . For example: Floor x 10' = 0: Floors 0 to 9; 'Floor x 10'
Floors by10[1] = 1: Floors 10 to 19 and s. o.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EXT 2:. Input E4.
2
ON
E2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B

TH
4 EXT 2:. Input E6.

5 EXT 2:. Input E7.

AN
6 EXT 2:. Input E8.

7 EXT 2:. Input E9.

8 EXT 2:. Input E10.

9 EXT 2:. Input E1.

Device Control

A EXT 2:. Input E2.

B EXT 2:. Input E3.

12


12


20

EXT 2:. Output S9.
G_
H

IN


FT

3.6.2.3 I/O EXT2 CAR 2 LI
Status of the inputs and outputs of the Extensions 2 of the COP2.
AG
_T

*3.6.2.3. I/O EXT2 * 1 Range: 0..15 Number of extension 2 (8 to 15) to visualize. Showed
Ext2[1] Extension's index.
ER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 EXT 2:. Input E1.

2
E2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B

IN
4 EXT 2:. Input E3.

RD
5 EXT 2:. Input E4.

6 EXT 2:. Input E5.

GA
7 EXT 2:. Input E6.

8 EXT 2:. Input E7.

Y_
9 EXT 2:. Input E8.

A EXT 2:. Input E9.
ON

B EXT 2:. Input E10.

TH


AN




Device Control



12


12
3.6.3 DOORS
Variables related to the control of the cabin doors.
20
3.6.3.1 I/O EXT.3
Status of the inputs and outputs of the Extension 3.
G_
IN
*3.6.3.1. I/O EXT.3* 1 Range: 0..2 Number of extension 3 (0 to 1) to visualize. Showed
FT
BAP BCP BCF OFF, ON Doors opening order.
2
(2) (3) (4)
IR IRM LAP LCP
(5) (6) (7) (8)
3
4
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
LI
Doors closing order.
Forced closing order.

AG
5 OFF, ON Optical moving back.

6 OFF, ON Mechanical moving back.

_T
7 OFF, ON Opening limit.

Closing limit.
ER
8 OFF, ON

3.6.4 CAR ROOF
IN
Variables related to the elements of the cabin roof.

3.6.4.1 VARIABLES
RD
General variables of the Extensions 4 of the car roof.

GA

Y_
*3.6.4.1. VARIABLES* 1 OFF, ON 'Inspection' mode switch.

BMM BSM BDM
(1) (2) (3) 2 OFF, ON Inspection - GO UP.

ON
SC CC CO CU
(4) (5) (6) (7) 3 OFF, ON Inspection - GO DOWN.
FS FB FTA

(8) (9) (10) 4 OFF, ON Overload

TH
ALCA VENT RB
5 OFF, ON Full Load.
(11) (12) (13)
AN
6 OFF, ON C0 sensor.

7 OFF, ON CU sensor.

8 OFF, ON Entrance arrow UP.

9 OFF, ON Entrance arrow DOWN.

Device Control

10 OFF, ON Autodialer filter.

11 OFF, ON Car lighting.

12
12 OFF, ON Fan.

13 OFF, ON Fireman mode.

12
3.6.4.2 I/O EXT4
20
Status of the inputs and outputs of the Extensions 4.
G_
IN
*3.6.4.2. I/O EXT4 * 1 Range: 0..1 Number of extension 4 (0 to 1) to visualize. Showed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXT 4:. Input E1.
2
E2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FT
S9 A B C D E 3 EXT 4:. Input E2.

4 EXT 4:. Input E3.
LI
5 EXT 4:. Input E4.

AG
6 EXT 4:. Input E5.

7 EXT 4:. Input E6.

_T
8 EXT 4:. Input E7.

9 EXT 4:. Output S1.

ER
A EXT 4:. Output S2.

B EXT 4:. Output S3.

IN

RD


GA
3.7 EXTENSIONS 1
Y_
Variables related to the Extensions 1.
3.7.1 I/O EXT1

ON
Status of the inputs and outputs of the landing extensions.

TH

AN
*3.7.1. I/O EXT1 * 1 Range: 0..63 Number of extension 1 to visualize.. Extension index to be
Ext1[1] showed.
1 2 FB FS CRP EXT 1:. Input E1.
2
E 2 3
S 4 5 6 7 8 3 EXT 1:. Input E2.


Device Control

4 EXT 1:. Output 1.

5 EXT 1:. Output 2.

12
6 EXT 1:. Output 3.

7 EXT 1:. Output 4.

12
8 EXT 1:. Output 5.

20
3.8 EXTENSIONS 5
Variables related to the Extensions 5.
G_
3.8.1 I/O EXT5
IN
Status of the inputs and outputs of the Extensions 5.
FT
*3.8.1. I/O EXT5 * 1 Range: 0..63 Number of extension 5 (0 to 63) to visualize.. Extension
Ext5[1]
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
LI index to be showed.
EXT 5:. Input E1.
E 2 3 4 5 6 7
AG
S 8 9 A B C D 3 EXT 5:. Input E2.

4 EXT 5:. Input E3.

_T
5 EXT 5:. Input E4.

6 EXT 5:. Input E5.

ER
7 EXT 5:. Input E6.

IN


RD
A EXT 5:. Output S3.

B EXT 5:. Output S4.

GA

Y_

3.9 NODES DISCARD
ON
Disconnected nodes (Extensions).

3.9.1 LIST NODES
TH
List of disconnected nodes.

AN

*3.9.1. LIST NODES * 1 MAN, REG, EX4, EX3, Node type (Controller, Extension, Gateway...). Node type
Nodo Pre NA NB TLS, SUP, PQ, LCD, (Controller, Extension, Gateway...).
0)1 2 3 4 5 GTW, EX2, EX1, EX5,
1) E1H,

Device Control

2) 2 Node type (Controller, Extension, Gateway...). Node
... number.
19) NO, YES Indicates if node is present.
3
12
4 Number of times node has been added (following first
deletion) since last list reset.
5 Number of times node has been deleted since last list

12
reset.
3.9.2 ERASE LIST
20
Erase list.
G_
IN
*3.9.2. ERASE LIST * 1 NO, YES Command to reset log in/out historics.
Delete list [1]
3.A COM HORI
FT
Horizontal communications' variables.
3.A.1 TRAFFIC GROUP
Traffic group's variables.
LI
AG
_T
*3.A.1. TRAFFIC GRO* 1 Absolute car identifier the CT is connected to. See
No(1) GT(2) MT(3) parameter 5.1.2 'Num.Node Man'. If identifier is equal to
255, it means that this node is not within the traffic group.
ER
NoGT GWGT
0) (4) (5) Traffic group identifier. See parameter 5.1.2 'Traf.Group
2
8) (6) Id'.
...
IN
3 Absolute car identifier of the traffic group master.

11) ()
4 Absolute car identifiers of the lifts within the traffic group.
If identifier is equal to 255, it means that this node is not
RD
within the traffic group.

5 Identifiers of the gateways within the traffic group. If
identifier is equal to 255, it means that this node is not
GA

6 Identifiers of the gateways within the traffic group. If
identifier is equal to 255, it means that this node is not
Y_

ON
Traffic group's variables.

3.A.2 GENERATOR GROUP
TH
Variables of the generator group.

AN

*3.A.2. GENERATOR G* 1 Absolute car identifier the CT is connected to. See
No(1)GG(2)MG(3) parameter 5.1.2 'Num.Node Man'. If identifier is equal to
NoGG 255, it means that this node is not within the traffic group.

Device Control

0) (4) 2 Indicates the number of the generator this lift is
1) () connected to. .
2) () Absolute ID of the master of the GG group generator.
3
...
12
15) () 4 IDs of the nodes that make up the GG group generator. If
the ID is255, then the node is not present
12
3.B TRAFFIC
Variables related to the traffic algorithms.
20
3.B.1 TRAFFIC CGC
G_
Variables related to the algorithm CGC.
3.B.1.1 CALL QUEUE
IN
It shows the status of the floor calls queue classified in descending order of preference.
'Lev' Floor of the registered call.
FT

'Dir' Direction of the call 'U' (up) or 'D' (down).
'Ran' Range of the call in the queue:

NO (normal) - LW (long wait) - H1 (heavy1)
P1 (priority1) - H2 (heavy2) - P2 (priority2)
LI
AG
'Time' Waiting time of the call(seconds).
_T

*3.B.1.1. CALL QUEU* 1 Floor of the registered call.
ER
Lev Dir Ran Time

0)(1) (2)(3)(4)s 2 U, D Direction of the call 'U' (up) or 'B' (down).

IN
3 NO, LW, H1, P1, H2, Range of the call in the queue.
P2
4 Units: [s] Waiting time of the call (seconds).

RD
3.B.1.2 VARIABLES
GA
General variables of the traffic algorithm.

Y_

ON
*3.B.1.2. VARIABLES* 1 Threshold switch(CGC): If its value is 1, call assignment is

Switch Umbral (1) done according to their waiting time. If its value is 0
Umbral Tespera(2)s (saturated lift), calls are assigned to nearest floors. Calls
TH
are assigned in the order of 0 the lift installation is

saturated.
See parameters N.ACT.BLOQ and N.DES.BLOQ (5.2.3.4).
AN
2 Units: [s] Waiting time threshold (CGC). Is obtained by calculating

the mean value of the waiting time of the calls in the last
sampling (see parameter 'Samples time') multiplied by
parameter 'Up_Limit_Const'. Calls with a waiting time
greater than this value are given priority. Stands for the
traffic saturation of the lift installation. The maximum
value is limited by parameter 'Max.Wait Time'.

Device Control
3.B.1.3 CARS
It shows for each car of the traffic group: out of service, directional, number of calls assigned
by the algorithm and floor and direction of the first assigned call.
'N' Car identifier into its traffic group.
12
'FS' Out of service: 'Y' (YES), 'N' (NO).
'D' Directional: 'Y' (YES), 'N' (NO).
12
'NL' Number of calls assigned to the car.
'1a' Number of floor and direction of the first assigned call.
20
G_
*3.B.1.3. CARS * 1 Y, N Active flag (TRUE = Car operating)..
N FS D NL 1a
01 2 3 4 5 2 N, Y Commitment flag (TRUE = Car NO free)..

IN
1
2 3 Number of LC assigned to the car..
...

FT
5 4 Floor and direction of the LC assigned to a car ordered by
distance..
5 U, D Floor and direction of the LC assigned to a car ordered by
distance.
LI
3.B.1.4 HEAVY T. DATA
AG
Data from HEAVY2 function of the CGC algorithm.
_T

ER
*3.B.1.4. HEAVY T. * 1 Logic position of the floor..

0)Level(1)Dir (2)
(3)(4) 2 UP, DN Call's direction..

IN
(5)(6)
1)Level()Dir () 3 Init data.. Part identifying the time .
()()

()() 4 Init data.. Part identifying the date.

RD
2)Level()Dir ()
5 Final data.. Part identifying the time .
()()
()()

GA
6 Final data.. Part identifying the date.

...
19)Level()Dir ()

7 NO, YES Used to reset 'Heavy data' and 'Switch data' statistics.
()()
Y_
()()
Reset Status [7]
ON
3.B.1.5 SWITCH DATA

Data of the function SWITCH of the algorithm CGC.
TH

AN

*3.B.1.5. SWITCH DA* 1 Init data.. Part identifying the time .
Activation: 0
(1)(2) 2 Init data.. Part identifying the date.
(3)(4)
Activation: 1 3 Final data.. Part identifying the time .

Device Control

()() 4 Final data.. Part identifying the date.
()()
Activation: 2
()()
12
()()
...
Activation: 19
12
()()
()()
20
3.C GENERATOR
Variables related to generator.
G_
3.C.1 OWN DATA
Own node's variables.
IN
FT
*3.C.1. OWN DATA * 1 NO, YES Indicates that the controller has requested a start from
Start request (1) LI the generator algorithm..
Start perm. (2) NO, YES Indicates controller has permission to start.
Gen.Cancel.Perm (3)
2
AG
Gen.activated (4) 3 NO, YES Indicates controller has been cancelled.

4 NO, YES (YES) Generator in operation

_T
3.C.2 GROUP DATA

ER
Variables of the other controllers of the generator group.

IN

RD
*3.C.2. GROUP DATA * 1 Range: 0..5 Logic index of the controller in the generator group.
Id.Car Group Gen[1]
Start request (2) 2 NO, YES Indicates if controller has sought permission to start.
Start perm. (3)
GA
Gen.Cancel.Perm (4) 3 NO, YES Indicates if start permission present.

Gen.activated (5)

Out of Serv (6) 4 NO, YES Indicates if controller has been cancelled by generator

Y_
algorithm.
5 NO, YES Indicates if generator input has been activated.

ON
6 NO, YES Out of order.

3.D MODES/FUNCTIONS
TH
Modes' or variables of the mode's functions.

AN
3.D.1 ZONE CANCEL

Zone annulation's variables.

Device Control

*3.D.1. ZONE CANCEL* 1 Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).
0:1 1:2 2:3 3:4
Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).
12
4:5 5:6 6:7 7:8 2
8:9 9:A 10:B 11:C
12:D 13:E 14:F 15:G 3 Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

12
4 Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).


20


G_

IN

A Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

FT
B Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

C Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

D
LI Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).
E Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

AG
F Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

_T
G Cancel zone's status (Zones 0 to 15).

3.D.2 FORZ.SUPERVISOR
ER
Modes forced by supervisor.

IN

RD
*3.D.2. FORZ.SUPERV* 1 NO, YES Forced the controller to a mode or status, always in case
Forz. EV [1] the function is validated:
Forz. IAU [2]
GA
EV:[YES] Activates the evacuation mode.

Forz. IAN [3]
2 NO, YES IAU:[YES] Activates the urgent cancellation mode.
Forz. IAF [4]
Forz. IB [5]
Y_
3 NO, YES IAN:[YES] Activates the non-urgent cancellation mode.

Forz. IAE [6]
Forz. IAC [7] NO, YES IAF:[YES] Activates the water in pit mode.
Forz. GEN [8] 4
ON
Forz. ALGSEC [9] NO, YES IB:[YES] Activates the firemen's service..
5
Forz. IG [10]
Forz. IPEP [11] 6 NO, YES IAE:[YES] Activates the car priority service, with landing
[12]
TH
Forz. BYPASSI call cancellation.

Forz. AZ [13][14] NO, YES IAC:[YES] Activates the car priority service, with landing
Forz. AnuPis[15][16] 7 and car call cancellation.
AN
8 NO, YES GEN:[YES] Activates the generator function.

9 NO, YES ALGSEC:[YES] Not implemented.

10 NO, YES IG:[SI] Activates the fire general mode.

11 NO, YES IPEP:[SI] Activates the fire alternative mode.

Device Control

12 NO, YES BYPASSI:[SI] Activates bypass of fire mode.

13 Range: 0..15 Index of the zone cancelled (0 to 16).

12
14 NO, YES [YES] Activates the cancelling zones function from a
supervisor. Not implemented yet.
15 Range: 0..63 Index of floor for floor cancellation function from

12
Supervisor.
16 NO, YES [YES] Status of the cancellation, from Supervisor, of
floor's call and car's call corresponding to indicated floor.
20
It is possible to do the cancellation from CT too.
3.D.3 SPECIAL AUTO. TRAF.
G_
Variables of Special Automatic traffic (S.A.T.)
IN
FT
*3.D.3. SPECIAL AUT* 1 NO, YES Indicate if the S.A.T. is activated.
Enabled S.A.T. (1)
S.A.T. Type (2) 2 NO, MF, AUTO Type of S.A.T.
ELLA ETMR
LI NO: No activated.
(3) (4)
MF: The lift travel until the Main Floor of the special
STAE SMF SAUTO Traffic and it rest parked as the type of park indicated in
AG
(5) (6) (7) CT 5.A.6.1.
SPQ1 SPQ2 SIR
AUTO: the lift realise Automatic travels as the sequence
(8) (9) (10)
stabilised in CT 5.A.6.1.
Next stop (11)
_T
End Cycle (12) 3 OFF, ON EXT 2:. Input E8.

Remind FAN (13)

(14) 4 OFF, ON EXT 5:. Input E1.
Mode
ER
Out of Service (15)

5 OFF, ON EXT 5:. Output S1.


IN

RD


GA

11 Next stop floor when the Mode of S.A.T. is activated.

Y_
12 NO, YES Indicate that is going to finish the Mode of S.A.T.

13 NO, YES Remind the state of Fan before the activation of S.A.T.

ON
TH
AN

Device Control

14 INSPECTION Operating mode: INSPECTION, EMERGENCY, FIREMEN,
NORMAL EVACUATION (rescue), WATER IN PIT, DOOR BLOCKED,
PRI CAR (car priority), URG_CANCEL (urgent cancellation),
12
EMERGENCY GENERATOR, VIP, NORMAL, REENV.TLSV (homelanding
GENERATOR provoked by the autodialler), FIRE (EN81-73).
URG_CANCEL The Emergency mode is activated by means of switch
12
BMCM and with parameter 'Assembly mode' of menu 7
DOOR BLOCKED
activated.
WATER_PIT
NON_URG_CANCEL blocked' command of menu 4.3.1.
20
AUX RESC
PRI CAR
G_
EVACUA
GEN SHUTDOWN
VIP
IN
REENV.TLSV
FIRE
15 NO, YES Indicate that the lift is Out of Service for one cause
FT
different to S.A.T.
3.E LOAD WEIGH

LI
AG
_T
*3.E. LOAD WEIGH * 1 OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh inputs. Physical input CEM1
CEM1 CEM2 F24V TOK Contactor of autonomous rescue 1 input.
(1) (2) (3) (4) OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh inputs. Physical input CEM2
2
ER
SINHP SCEM1 SCEM2 Contactor of autonomous rescue 2 input.

(5) (6) (7)
3 OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh inputs. Physical input F24V 24 V
Temp (8) failure input.
Load level (9)
IN
4 OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh inputs. Physical input TEMPOK

Inverter temperature OK.
5 OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh outputs. Cancel Load weigh.

RD
6 OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh outputs. Contactor of autonomous

rescue 1 output.
GA
7 OFF, ON Matrix of Load weigh outputs. Contactor of autonomous

rescue 2 output.
8 Matrix of Load weigh inputs. Inverter temperature.

Y_
9 Load level read by the Load weigh device. It takes values

from 0 to 1100 (1100 means the load is 110%, that is,
overload).
ON
4 FUNCTIONS
TH
Execution of functions, which provoke actions in the controller.

AN
4.1 ENABLE CALLS

Activation of calls

Device Control

*4.1. ENABLE CALLS * 1 Floor call
Floor[1] Act [2]
Type [3] 2 NO, YES Activates the PIC speed test function.
Entr[4] Pos (5)
12
3 CAR, LAND_U, Call type
LAND_D, VIP
4 ENT1, ENT2 Access call
12
5 With the car at rest:
In the door zone: this is the floor the car is parked at.
20
possible.
G_
IN
4.2 PARAMETERS
Management of the parameters.
FT
4.2.1 STORE PARAMETERS
Storing of parameters.
LI
AG
*4.2.1. STORE PARAM* 1 NO, YES Store Parameters command
_T
Store Param. [1]

Pend. storing (2) 2 NO, YES [YES]: Indicates that a parameter has changed, but the
'Store Param' function 4.2.1 has not been activated yet
ER
4.2.2 ASSOCIATED PARAM.

Parameters
IN
4.2.2.1 INI CONFG CALLS

Permits restoring the factory default parameters
RD

GA

*4.2.2.1. INI CONFG* 1 NO, YES Gets the calls default configuration.
Y_
Inic. Confg. Cal[1]
4.2.2.2 CONFG NET

ON
Functions to facilitate the management of the parameters of the horizontal bus.

TH

AN
*4.2.2.2. CONFG NET* 1 NO, YES YES: CT 5.2.1 'Num Node Man' is automatically calculated
Calc IDFisico Ta[1] in terms of other data of the bus.
NO: CT 5.2.1 'Num Node Man' may be manually
programmed.
4.2.3 RESTORE
Permits restoring the factory default parameters

Device Control
WARNING: All changes made in installation will be lost.

*4.2.3. RESTORE * 1 NO, YES Permits restoring the factory default parameters.
12
ExtractDefaultPa[1]
4.3 MAINTENANCE
12
Functions for the maintenance of the lift.
4.3.1 DOOR BLOCKED
20
Door blocked function of the lift.
The lift makes the vertical movements but doesn't open the doors in any case.
G_
IN
*4.3.1. DOOR BLOCKE* 1 NO, YES This command enables the door lock mode (provided no
FT
Door Blocked [1] other top priority mode is active).
Relev.Do.Blocked[2] Landing calls are cancelled; car calls are processed, but
Test.Up.Sfty [3] the doors will not open as the lift reaches the floor. The
Test.Low.Sfty [4]
LI door open pushbutton is active and if pressed, the door
remains open until a new car call is made. All the car calls
are erased when carrying out a door reopening or on
reaching a new floor. This function is useful to test the lift
AG
installation without external calls interfering with.
2 NO, YES [NO]: Self-re-levelling is cancelled in the door lock mode.
This function is useful when adjusting the lift stop.
_T
3 NO, YES If this command is enabled in the door lock mode, the car
performs an up travel without carrying out the levelling
process. It serves to check the safety features at the
ER
upper end of the enclosure

4 NO, YES If this command is enabled in the door lock mode, the car
performs a down travel without carrying out the levelling
IN

lower part of the enclosure
4.3.2 L.WELL EXPLOR.

RD
Lift well exploration

GA

Y_
*4.3.2. L.WELL EXPL* 1 NO, YES This command activates the lift well exploration. The car
Act [1] performs a journey from the lower to the upper floor,
TypeWellExpl exploring the speed change points, stops, etc. It detects
ON
the defects of the lift installation which may affect the car
positioning system.
TH
4.3.5 FINE RELEVEL.TYPE II

See norm 0466010
AN


Device Control

*4.3.5. FINE RELEVE* 1 Units: [pulses] This is the distance (in pulses) from the position where
Dis.Lev.Pt.(1)p the car stopped in a floor-to-floor journey to the levelling
Dist_LevP [2]p point.
Dist V00 [3]p Positive value: the car overran the levelling point
12
Hysteresis V00 [4]p Negative value: the car did not overrun the levelling point.
Test FLev [5]
[6] 2 Units: [pulses] Distance in pulses from the stop points of levelling speed
F.Lev Type V0 to the levelling point.
12
Enable V00 [7] Default value: 19
3 Units: [pulses] Distance in pulses from the levelling point to the inching
Default value: 5 zone start point.
20
4 Units: [pulses] Number of pulses for lag of inching stop point (speed
Default value: 1 V00) with respect to the end of the inching zone
(parameter Dist_V00)
G_
5 NO, YES When this command is enabled, the car can be offset with
the door open and close pushbuttons and the up and
down pushbuttons on the emergency control station
IN
6 Default value: HARD HARD: Switches CIFS,CIFB are used for inching (at speed
HARD, SOFT V00)
SOFT: Inching is performed with switches CIFS, CIFB.
FT
Positioning system must be type II (encoder on the over
speed governor).
In both cases:
LI
The drive must be closed loop V3F (DRV Type: T_V3F_2C
(5.3.1))
Parameter 'V00' (5.3.2) must be on.
AG
The control must include a device for movement with
doors open.
Parameter 're-level DO' (5.5.3.1) must be enabled.
_T
7 NO, YES Validates the speed level.

4.3.7 TRAFFIC AUTO
ER
Force the lift to make travels continuously. The destination floor is random in case it is
activated 'Auto Traffic' or can be forced between two floors in case it is activated 'Auto Traf.
IN
Extr.' The lift shouldn't be on inspection or emergency. The time b it is activated 'Auto Traf.
Extr.' The lift shouldn't be on inspection or emergency. The time between two travels can be
modified with two parameters.
RD
In case the doors are blocked ( 4.3.1 'Door Blocked' [YES]) the stop time between two travels is the
one shown in parameter 5.3.3 'Stop V0.
GA
In case of normal mode, the stop time between two travels is the addition of the following times:
Time of door open
Y_
Time of door close

Time of parameter 5.5.2.1 'Car call'
ON

TH
*4.3.7. TRAFFIC AUT* 1 NO, YES With this command enabled, car calls are generated
Auto Traffic [1] randomly. It serves to check the real lift performance. In
Traf. Auto Extre[2] the event of a multiplex control, the horizontal
AN
Upper Fl. Traf. [3] communications bus cable must be disconnected for this
Lower Fl. Traf. [4] function to be effective in all of the controls.
Door Blocked [5] 2 NO, YES [YES] Activates the automatic traffic between 'Upper Fl.
Stop V0 [6]d Traf.' and 'Lower Fl. Traf.'. The elevator travels from
Stop_T Auto Tr[7]s 'Upper Fl. Traf.' to 'Lower Fl. Traf.' and from 'Lower Fl.
Traf.' to 'Upper Fl. Traf.', alternatively.

Device Control

T.Doo. A1[8] A2[9] 3 Default value: 16 High floor of the automatic traffic between two floors.

4 Default value: 0 Low floor of the automatic traffic between two floors.

12
5 NO, YES This command enables the door lock mode (provided no
other top priority mode is active).
Landing calls are cancelled; car calls are processed, but
12
the doors will not open as the lift reaches the floor. The
door open pushbutton is active and if pressed, the door
20
6 Units: [s/10] Stop time..

G_
Default value: 20
7 Units: [s] Stop time between two consecutive travels in automatic
traffic. In the rest of movements, the stop time depends
IN
Default value: 18
of 'Stop V0'.
8 NO, YES It allows cycles of opening and closing of doors on a
concrete floor and access.
FT
To this must be configured the following commands and
parameters:
'Traf. Auto Extre' [YES]
LI
'Upper Fl. Traf.' and 'Lower Fl. Traf.' with the same value
For installations with a single door, activate the command
'T.Doo. A1'.
AG
For installations with two doors:
If you want to perform the test on the two doors, activate
the two commands 'T.Doo. A1' and 'T.Doo A2'
_T
If you want to perform the test on a single door, you must

declare the floor as experts and activists on the Test
Access for 'T.Doo. A1' or 'T.Doo. A2'
ER
9 NO, YES It allows cycles of opening and closing of doors on a

concrete floor and access.
To this must be configured the following commands and
IN
parameters:
'Traf. Auto Extre' [YES]
'Upper Fl. Traf.' and 'Lower Fl. Traf.' with the same value
RD
For installations with a single door, activate the command

'T.Doo. A1'.
GA
For installations with two doors:

If you want to perform the test on the two doors, activate
the two commands 'T.Doo. A1' and 'T.Doo A2'
Y_
If you want to perform the test on a single door, you must

declare the floor as experts and activists on the Test
Access for 'T.Doo. A1' or 'T.Doo. A2'
ON
4.3.8 CAN ANALYSIS

Shows the CAN network quality level
TH
It is used to validate the right arrangement of the wires in the machine room and main board
zone to avoid interferences.
AN


Device Control

*4.3.8. CAN ANALYSI* 1 Measures the error rate on the vertical CAN bus. It is
Pcent CAN (1) determined by counting the cyclic messages (200ms) of
Times BusOFF (2) extension 4.0 that reach the control in a period of 4
Reset Times OFF [3] seconds.
12
Ena.CntrlBusOFF [4] Value 100 stands for the situation in which all the
T.Recov.BusOFF[5]d expected messages have been received.
Values less than 100 stand for the situation in which not
12
all the expected messages have been received. Review
cable's disposition.
Values 112, 113 and 114 show that there is a fatal error in
20
the CAN bus.
2 Number in which the CAN controller has entered the Bus
OFF state.
G_
This value is reset when:
It gets its maximum value (65535).
The control is switched off.
IN
The functions 'Reset Times OFF' is activated.
It is related with anomaly AN_BUSOFF_V.
FT
3 NO, YES Resets 'Times Bus OFF'. See 'Times Bus OFF'.

4 Default value: YES [YES] Enable of detection of anomaly AN_BUSV_OFF
NO, YES (2236).
5 Units: [s/10]
LI
[NO] Recovers the anomaly.
Minimum time without increment of 'Times Bus OFF' to
Default value: 20 recover anomaly AN_BUSOFF_V.
AG
4.3.9 AUTODIALLER TEST

_T
Autodialler's functionality test.

4.3.9.1 VOICE TEST
ER
Voice's test made from cabins.

IN

Activates the voice's test (monthly test) of the autodialler
RD
*4.3.9.1. VOICE TES* 1 NO, YES

Act. Voice Test [1] from the cabin. When activated, the Control is set to
T.finish test (2)m 'Homelanding Autodialler' mode, annulets all the landing
Mode (3) calls and once car's calls at attended, it makes a car's call
GA
Logic position (4) to floor 'End level', landing with the doors open. The
Car Statu(5) technician has then a time 'Test time' from activation of
Enable test [6] test to make the voice's test. Once that time gets to zero,
the test is over. It is also over in case 'Act. Voice Test'
Y_
End level [7]

Test time [8]m [NO].
Result test (9) 2 Units: [min] Time to finish the voice's test of the autodialler. This time
is loaded with value 'Test time' when the test is initialized.
ON
Once this time gets to zero, the control leaves

'Homelanding Autodialler' mode.
TH
AN

Device Control

3 INSPECTION Operating mode: INSPECTION, EMERGENCY, FIREMEN,
NORMAL EVACUATION (rescue), WATER IN PIT, DOOR BLOCKED,
PRI CAR (car priority), URG_CANCEL (urgent cancellation),
12
EMERGENCY GENERATOR, VIP, NORMAL, REENV.TLSV (homelanding
GENERATOR provoked by the autodialler), FIRE (EN81-73).
URG_CANCEL The Emergency mode is activated by means of switch
12
BMCM and with parameter 'Assembly mode' of menu 7
DOOR BLOCKED
activated.
WATER_PIT
NON_URG_CANCEL blocked' command of menu 4.3.1.
20
AUX RESC
PRI CAR
G_
EVACUA
GEN SHUTDOWN
VIP
IN
REENV.TLSV
FIRE
FT
LI With the car in motion: the nearest floor where levelling is
possible.
AG
5 IDLE, RUN_DC, Car running status. RUN_DC (Travelling with door closed);
_T
RUN_DO RUN_DA (Travelling with door open); IDLE

6 Default value: NO Enable to make the voice's test (monthly) of the
autodialler.
ER
NO, YES
7 Default value: 17 Floor to redirect the car when voice test of the autodialler
is started.
IN
Default value: [17] or floor where control machine is sited.

8 Units: [min] Maximum time to make the voice's test. The test is
Default value: 5 finished when the time is over or if 'Act. Voice Test' [NO]
RD
(CT 4.3.9.1).
9 OK, ERR, PTE Result of the voice test of the autodialler.

GA
Voice's test made from cabins.

Y_
4.3.A POSI. TYPE III

Regulation of the stopping (levelling) in the type III positioning system.
ON
4.3.A.1 STOP REG.

TH

AN

*4.3.A.1. STOP REG.* 1 Range: 0..63 Index for parameters 'Delay up', 'Delay On'.


Device Control

Level[1]LP(2) (3) 2 With the car at rest:
Stop delay Up [4] In the door zone: this is the floor the car is parked at.
Stop delay Down[5]
12
possible.
12
UP, DN Direction of the last movement. Up: Up; Down.
20
3
4 Default value: 1 Stop delay for up movement for LP (logic position). It is
measured in mm. It is used in Type III positioning.
G_
5 Default value: 1 Stop delay for down movement for LP (logic position). It is
measured in mm. It is used in Type III positioning.
IN
4.3.A.2 DV0(RELEV)
FT
*4.3.A.2. DV0(RELEV*
DV0 [1]p
No.
1
Mark

Possible Values
Units: [pulses]
LI
Description
Distance in pulses from the stop points of levelling speed
V0 to the levelling point.
Default value: 19
AG
dp (2)p
2 Units: [pulses] Distance in pulses among the position of stop point (point
de(3)p (4) in that it eliminates the level of speed V0 or V00) and the
stop position. It serves for to calculate the parameter DV0
_T
3 Units: [pulses] This is the distance (in pulses) from the position where
the car stopped in a floor-to-floor journey to the levelling
point.
ER
Positive value: the car overran the levelling point

Negative value: the car did not overrun the levelling point.
4 UP, DN Direction of the last movement. Up: Up; Down.

IN
4.3.A.3 PARAM/COM
RD

GA

Y_
*4.3.A.3. PARAM/COM* 1 NO, YES When this command is enabled, the car can be offset with
Test Ison. [1] the door open and close pushbuttons and the up and
IsonV00 [2] down pushbuttons on the emergency control station
IsonV0 [3] NO, YES Validates the speed level.
2
ON
Dist V00 [4]p

HV00 [5]p 3 NO, YES [YES]: It allows the normal isolevelling movements (at
HV0 [6]p speed V0) of the type III positioning system.
TH
LCSB [7] [8]p Units: [pulses] Distance in pulses from the levelling point to the inching
4 Default value: 5 zone start point.
Units: [pulses] Number of pulses for lag of inching stop point (speed
AN
5 Default value: 1 V00) with respect to the end of the inching zone
6 Units: [pulses] Hysteresis of the normal re-levelling zone.
Default value: 2
7 Default value: 1 CSB magnet length for Type III positioning.

Device Control

8 Units: [pulses] CSB magnet length for Type III positioning.
Default value: 95
4.3.B TECHNICAL INSP.
12
4.3.B.1 GENERAL PARAM/COM
12
20
G_
*4.3.B.1. GENERAL P* 1 NO, YES Indicator of the Technical Inspection Mode. This Flag
Tec.Insp Permi. [1] indicates that the PPQ card is getting information from the
Door Lock [2] inverter.
IN
D.Lock Relev. [3] NO, YES This command enables the door lock mode (provided no
2
VInsp [4] other top priority mode is active).
FT
LI
AG
3 NO, YES [NO]: Self-re-levelling is cancelled in the door lock mode.
This function is useful when adjusting the lift stop.
4 Default value: 60 Speed value.

_T
4.3.B.2 FLOOR TO FLOOR MOV.

ER

IN

*4.3.B.2. FLOOR TO * 1 Floor call
RD
LL[1] Ac[2] PL(3)

Cur.Pos.(4) 2 NO, YES Activates the PIC speed test function.
Inv.Int. (5)d
GA
Inv.Velo. (6)m 3 With the car at rest:

Inv. Torque (7)
Y_

possible.
ON

TH
4 This is the absolute car position in position system 2.

At the upper edge of magnet CB at the lower terminal
floor, it is 2000mm
AN
5 Units: [s/10] Variable that indicates the real value of the current of the
inverter.
6 Units: [min] Variable that indicates the real value of the speed of the
inverter.
7 Variable that indicates the real value of the torque of the
inverter.

Device Control
4.3.B.3 SAFETY TEST

12
*4.3.B.3. SAFETY TE* 1 NO, YES If this command is enabled in the door lock mode, the car
TSeg.SUP[1] INF[2] performs an up travel without carrying out the levelling
12
Pos(3) (4) process. It serves to check the safety features at the
Inv.Int. (5)d upper end of the enclosure
Inv.Velo. (6)c 2 NO, YES If this command is enabled in the door lock mode, the car
Inv. Torque (7) performs a down travel without carrying out the levelling
20
lower part of the enclosure
G_
IN
possible.
FT
This is the absolute car position in position system 2.
4 LI
At the upper edge of magnet CB at the lower terminal
floor, it is 2000mm
AG
5 Units: [s/10] Variable that indicates the real value of the current of the
inverter.
6 Units: [s/100] Variable that indicates the real value of the speed of the
inverter.
_T

inverter.
ER
4.3.B.4 UCM TEST

Annex 3 Technical Inspection
IN

RD

*4.3.B.4. UCM TEST * 1 NO, YES
UCM Test [1]
GA
4.3.C MOD.AUTO.RELOJ
Y_
Parameters for configuring the automatic adjustment to the controllers clock summer/winter.
ON

TH
*4.3.C. MOD.AUTO.RE* 1 Default value: NO [YES]Updates the time automatically on changing summer
Ajuste Automat. [1] NO, YES / winter and winter / summer.
Ajus.Invierno-Verano
2 Default value: _3
[2][3][4]
AN
Hora ant. [5] _1, _2, _3, _4, LA

Hora nue. [6] 3 Default value: DO denotes the day of the week (1 is Monday).
Ajus.Verano-Invierno LU, MA, MI, JU, VI,
[7][8][9] SA, DO

Device Control

Hora ant. [10] 4 ENE, FEB, MAR, ABR, Indicates the month that has made the time change
Hora nue. [11] MAY, JUN, JUL, AGO, summer to winter.
SEP, OCT, NOV, DIC
5 Default value: Part identifying the time .
12
[02:00:00]
6 Default value:
[03:00:00]
12
7 Default value: _3
_1, _2, _3, _4, LA
20
8 Default value: DO denotes the day of the week (1 is Monday).
LU, MA, MI, JU, VI,
SA, DO
G_
9 ENE, FEB, MAR, ABR,
MAY, JUN, JUL, AGO,
SEP, OCT, NOV, DIC
IN
10 Default value: Part identifying the time .
[03:00:00]
11 Default value:
[02:00:00]
FT
4.4 CLOCK

LI
AG
*4.4. CLOCK * 1 Part identifying the date.
_T
Date [1]
Time [2] 2 Part identifying the time .
Day [3]
ER
3 MO, TU, WD, TH, FR, denotes the day of the week (1 is Monday).
SA, SU
IN
Permits changing the date and time data of the controller's clock.
Display on screen is as described in the two following lines:
RD
Date [ 3/10/96] : (Day/ Month / Year) shows the clock's date.

Time [13: 4:10] : (Hours / Minutes / Seconds) shows the clock's time.
GA
Date/Time changing procedure:

Place the cursor in the desired field (Date or Time) and press the 'CONFIRM' key.
Y_

A flashing cursor moves in the field between []. Introduce the 6 digits using keys '0' to '9'.
Enter the digits successively (the cursor moves to the next position once a digit has been
ON
typed in).
Note1: If the figure in a field (hours, minutes, seconds, day, month, year) is less than 10,
first introduce zero. E.g. two p.m. five minutes, three seconds would be written: 14/05/03.
TH
Note2: January is month number '01', February '02' and so on.

Note3: Year 2005 is noted '05', 2006 '06' and so on.
AN
When all six digits have been typed, the cursor continues flashing on symbol ']'. Press either
the 'CONFIRM' key to save the new values or 'ESC' to quit without saving.
4.6 FILES
Functions for using files contained in the Memory Card.

Device Control
4.6.1 CURRENT VERSION INF.

Information about the control's actual software version.
12
*4.6.1. CURRENT VER* 1 Maximum: 12 characters Control's software version number.
Vers.CPU (1)
12
Vers.Da(2) 2 Maximum: 12 characters Control's software version creation data.
Vers.EPLD (3)
3 Number of version of the CPU's EPLD.

20
4.6.2 SMART MEDIA
G_
4.6.2.1 IDENTIFICATION
IN
the card.
FT
*4.6.2.1. IDENTIFIC*
Name (1)
Size (2)
1 LI Name to identify the Smart Media.
Size, in physical bytes, of the Smart Media

2
AG
Num.Sectors (3)
Bytes/page (5)


_T
Free kB (7)
5 Number of bytes per page of the Smart Media. The total
size of the Smart Media is [Number of pages] x
ER
6 Number of physical inputs that can be considered as
files.Usually it can reach 120 files per Smart Media card.
IN

4.6.2.2 FORMAT
RD
GA

Y_
*4.6.2.2. FORMAT * 1 Name of Smart Media to put during the format process.
ON
Format [2]

TH

32 Mb.
AN
4.6.2.3 EXPLORER
4.6.2.3.1 INFORMATION

Device Control

*4.6.2.3.1. INFORMA* 1 Exclusive identication number of file on Smart Media's file
ID Input (1) system. Smart Media's file system put this number
automatically.
12
Name [2]
Size (3) Range: 1..0 File's name. At least it must be one character. Files can
2
12
Type (6) Accurate size of file in bytes.
Origin (7) 3
4
20
Version (9)
5
Flags (11)
G_


IN
8 Target device.


FT
corrupted.
11 LI File attributes +1:Read only, +2:Hidden, +4:Encrypted,
AG
4.6.2.3.2 DELETE FILE

_T

4.6.2.3.3 TRANSFER FILE
ER
IN

*4.6.2.3.3. TRANSFE* 1
RD
Node(1)IDFile(2)
File (3) 2
Transfer? [4]
GA
3
4
Y_
ON
4.6.2.3.4 VIEW FILE

TH
4.6.2.3.5 VERIFY
AN
4.6.2.4 REPAIR

Device Control
5 PARAMETERS
Menu for the checking and programming of the controller parameters.

5.1 INSTALLATION
Parameters related to the lift installation characteristics.
12
NOTE: If any of these parameters is changed, the controller must be switched off and on to
make it effective.
12
5.1.1 CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics of the installation.
20
G_
*5.1.1. CHARACTERIS* 1 Default value: 17 Number of floors
Num of Floors [1]
IN
BottomFloor [2] 2 Default value: 0 Position of the lower terminal floor. Normally, the value
Reduced headroom[3] equals 0, except in the event of a traffic group with lifts
Reduced Pit [4] that do not reach the lower floor (asymmetrical lift),
FT
Re.headroom Man [5] where the parameter stands for the position of the lower
Re.headroom Carp[6] floor reached by the lift which is at the lower level in the
group
3 Default value: NO
NO, YES
LI Enable for the Compensatory Measures in case of reduced
headroom.
4 Default value: NO [YES] Short pit. Compensatory Measures EN81-21.

AG
NO, YES
5 Default value: NO Enable for the compensatory measures of reduced
NO, YES headroom in the M33 optimised. On emergency, it allows
_T
the movement in up direction above the point P39A.

6 Default value: NO [YES] Enables control of the compensatory measures
NO, YES reduced headroom For the M34.
ER
5.1.2 NETWORK DATA

Parameters related to the lift group and the horizontal bus.
IN

RD

*5.1.2. NETWORK DAT* 1 Default value: NO [YES]Enables horizontal communications.

GA
Hor.Com. [1] NO, YES

Num.Node Man Abs[2]
2 Range: 0..15 Absolute car identifier.
Num.Cars [3] Default value: 0
Y_
Traf.Group Id [4]
Traf.Car Id [5] 3 Range: 0..15 Indicates the number of cars in the traffic group (1
Shared PB.w/o GW[6] Default value: 1 simplex and universal, 2 duplex, 3 triplex etc). Is used for
Num GW TrafGroup[7] calculating 'Total out of s.'. See menu 3.1
ON
Num.GroupsH [8] Range: 0..15 Identifies the traffic group the lift belongs to.
4 Default value: 0 Serves to distinguish the different traffic groups connected
to the same Horizontal Bus.
TH
Connecting different traffic groups has to be made when a

same generator feeds various traffic groups.
AN
It can also be made when there is a monitor.

5 Range: 0..8 Identification of a lift within a traffic group. Must be: 0 for
Default value: 0 simplex, 0 and 1 for duplex, 0, 1 and 2 for triplex control,
etc. This parameter may not be greater than parameter
Num.Cabina (sub_menu 5.1.2).

Device Control

6 Default value: NO Indicates shared operating panel without gateway.
NO, YES Customized as follows [NO]No shared operating panel or
there is a shared operating panel with gateway.
[YES]Shared operating panel without gateway (extensions
12
1 directly connected to Bus H).
7 Range: 0..15 Number of gateways in the traffic group.
Default value: 0
12
8 Range: 0..15 Is the number of cars connected to the generator.
Default value: 4
20
5.2 TRAFFIC
Parameters related to traffic algorithms.
G_
5.2.2 SELECTIVE CTRL
IN
FT
*5.2.2. SELECTIVE C* 1 Range: 0..15 Indicates the number of cars in the traffic group (1
Num. Car [1] Default value: 1 simplex and universal, 2 duplex, 3 triplex etc). Is used for
t_Blocked
Capacity
[2]s
[3]
2 Units: [s]
LI
calculating 'Total out of s.'. See menu 3.1
This is the blocked car detection time, (time of motionless
Default value: 22 car with landing calls assigned to it). After this time is
AG
over, the call is assigned to another lift. It must be greater
than T.nugging (5.5.3) if Act.Nugging is enabled.
3 Default value: 17 Maximum permissible number of persons in the lift. Only

_T
CGC.
5.2.3 TRAFFIC CGC

ER
Parameters related to CGC traffic algorithm.

5.2.3.1 FLOORS CGC
IN

RD

GA
*5.2.3.1. FLOORS CG* 1 Default value: 0 Priority floor 0/1. Floor calls in these floors have priority
Prior Floor 0 [1] service, in function of value of parameters 'Bot. Limit
Bot. Limit 0 [2]s 0'/'Bot. Limit 1' and 'Top Limit 0'/'Top Limit 1',
respectively..
Y_
Top Limit 0 [3]s

Prior Floor 1 [] 2 Units: [s] Time after a floor call in floor 'Prior Floor 0'/'Prior Floor 1'
Bot. Limit 1 []s Default value: 20 becomes priority 1.
Top Limit 1 []s
ON
Heavy Floor 0 [4] 3 Units: [s] Time after a floor call in floor 'Prior Floor 0'/'Prior Floor 1'
Load Limit 0 [5]
Default value: 30 becomes priority 2.
Heavy Floor 1 [] Default value: 0 Heavy floors 0/1. See parameters 'Load Limit 0'/'Load
4
TH
Load Limit 1 [] Limit 1'. .

AN

Device Control

5 Default value: 3 If the difference of load between leaving car and arriving
car in the floor defined as 'Heavy Floor 0'/'Heavy Floor 1'
is bigger or equal to the corresponding parameter 'Load
Limit 0'/'Load Limit 1', the range of the call is
12
incremented: if NORMAL range ('NO') then it becomes
HEAVY1('H1'); if HEAVY1 range the it becomes
HEAVY2('H2'). If the call's range is HEAVY2 a free car is
redirected to that floor. Actually, the control uses two load
12
levels: value 0 (without load) and value 5 (full load). So
the difference of load necessary to redirect the car would
be from empty car to full load car. In the future, more
20
load levels will be controlled. For floors other than
parameters 'Heavy Floor 0'/'Heavy Floor 1', the value is
'Limit normal Q' (5.2.3.2). .
G_
5.2.3.2 CGC DATA
IN
FT
*5.2.3.2. CGC DATA * 1 Default value: 3 Value of the constant KHI used to calculate value of
Up_Limit_Const[1] variable 'Umbral Tespera' (3.B.1.2). Typical value deduced
Limit normal Q[2]
Samples time [3]s
2 Default value: 4
LI
by experimentation is 3.
See 'Load limit 0'/'Load limit 1' (5.2.3.1).
Num Samples [4]
AG
Max.Wait time[5]s 3 Units: [s] The time interval used to compute the average value of
Travel_T_Calc [6] Default value: 90 waiting times for wait calls. Typically 90 seconds.
Change Heavy [7]s
4 Default value: 7
_T

5 Units: [s] Maximum value of variable 'Umbral Tespera' (3.B.1A.2).
Default value: 90 Typical value is 90 seconds.
ER
6 NO, YES Calculate time of journey between floors for estimation of

parameters 'x_f travel t.' (5.2.3.3).
7 Units: [s] If no call is made from a HEAVY1 or HEAVY2 floor at the
IN
Default value: 60 end of this delay, the floor concerned will be rated
NORMAL or HEAVY1 respectively.
RD
5.2.3.3 CGC TIMES

GA

Y_
*5.2.3.3. CGC TIMES* 1 Units: [s] Estimated time to open the cabins doors.
D_open_t [1]s Default value: 3
ON
D_close_t [2]s
2 Units: [s] Estimated time to close the cabins doors.
Transfer_t [3]s Default value: 3
Travel_t 1_f [4]s
Travel_t 2_f []s 3 Units: [s] Estimated time of entry or exit in the car by a person.
TH
Travel_t 3_f []s Default value: 2

Travel_t 4_f []s
4 Units: [s] Journey's time between floors. For positioning system 2 if
... 'Travel_T_Calc' is validated a function is executed in order
AN
Travel_t 63_f[]s Default value: 4

to calculate those times. Those times are function of:
Num.Cars_Traf. [5]
journey, maximum speed, acceleration and jerk. They can
Id.Car_Traf. (6)
also be changed manually.
Identic_travel_t[7]
5 Range: 0..6 Identifier to visualize or modify a cabins parameter time
between floors. Identifier is equal to 'Ident.Cab.Traf.' in
menu CT 5.1.2).

Device Control

6 Range: 0..6 Identification of a lift within a traffic group. Must be: 0 for
simplex, 0 and 1 for duplex, 0, 1 and 2 for triplex control,
etc. This parameter may not be greater than parameter
Num.Cabina (sub_menu 5.1.2).
12
7 NO, YES Command to get similar travelling times between floors
for every cabin in the traffic group. Times of the
'Id.Cab.Traf.' cabin are copied to the rest.
12
5.2.3.4 FUNCTION SWITCH
20
G_
*5.2.3.4. FUNCTION * 1 Default value: 0 If the number of floor calls is bigger than this value the

IN
N.act.bloq1 [1] switch function is activated (3.A.2).
N.des.bloq1 [2] 'N.act.bloq1' is the value for activation of the switch
N.act.bloq2 [] function if there is only one car in service.
N.des.bloq2 []
FT
'N.act.bloq2' is the value for activation of the switch
N.act.bloq3 [] function if there are two cars in service.
N.des.bloq3 []
etc.
...
N.act.bloq6
N.des.bloq6
[]
[]
2 Default value: 2 LI
If the number of floor calls is equal or less than this value
the switch function is deactivated (function switch)
(3.A.2).
AG
'N.des.bloq1' is the value for deactivation of the switch
function if there is only one car in service.
'N.des.bloq2' is the value for activation of the switch
function if there are two cars in service.
_T
etc.

ER
5.2.4 ALG. SECUNDARIO

IN

RD

*5.2.4. ALG. SECUND* 1 Default value: NO It facilitates asymmetric traffic allowing to distinguish
Alg.ASIM [1] NO, YES between Two types of pushbuttons.
GA
Tipo ASIM. [2] The configured as a normal pushbutton is used when the
Bloqueo Alg. [3] desired destination can be served by any Elevators.
Equivalent to lift 'short'.
Y_
The VIP configured as pushbuttons is used to call

elevators serves all floors. Used for users that want to
access to any floors . For example, garages or
Penthouses.
ON
This parameter must be enabled on all elevators, both

'long' and 'short'.
TH
The elevators 'long' should also take the parameter CT

enabled 5.9.B 'Valid VIP'.
The asymmetries may be in higher plants, lower, middle,
or a combination of All, provided that no more than a
AN
difference in asymmetry between the elevator installation.

Device Control

2 Default value: ABAJO Set the asymmetry of the installation, to improve
ABAJO, ARRIBA Performance of the algorithm that allocates the calls to
the elevators 'long'.
[DOWN] When some elevators do not serve the lower
12
floors.
[TOP] When some elevators do not serve the upper floors.
In case of asymmetry in the upper and lower floors can be
12
[DOWN].
3 Default value: NO [YES] Prevents calls lifts are serving the pushbuttons
NO, YES 'Long' can simultaneously serve on the pushbutton called
20
'short'. This case serves to improve the service at peak
Traffic demand. However, worsening the quality of service
in the other cases. This parameter should be Configured
G_
depending on the traffic of each installation.
5.3 VERTICAL MOV.
IN
Parameters related to the vertical movement and the drive.
5.3.1 DRV.TYPE
FT
LI Description
AG
*5.3.1. DRV.TYPE * 1 Default value: T_V3F_2C Type of vertical drive
DRV Type.[1] T_2S E_2V: Electric Two Speeds
T_V3F_2C E_V3F_2C: V3F regulated electric with two contactors
_T
T_V3F_3C E_V3F_3C: V3F regulated electric with three contactors

T_V3F_CAN E_V3F_CAN: V3F regulated electric with two contactors
H_DIR_NR CAN interface
ER
H_DIR_R H_DIR_NR: Hydraulic direct acting, no regulation

H_ST_NR H_DIR_R: Hydraulic direct acting, regulated
H_ST_NR: Hydraulic star-delta starting, no regulation
IN
H_ST_R
H_SOFT_NR H_ST_R: Hydraulic star-delta starting, regulated
H_SOFT_R H_ST_NR: Hydraulic softstarter, no regulation
RD
H_ST_R: Hydraulic softstarter, regulated
5.3.2 SPEEDS
GA
Parameters to fix the values of the intermediate and maximal speeds.

Y_

*5.3.2. SPEEDS * Units: [cm/s] Rated speed: Associated with this parameter are the
ON
1
Rated speed [1]n Default value: 250 parameters listed in Annex A1 of the positioning norm.
Vmax [2]n
350, 250, 200, 160,
V3[3]Value[4]n
TH
100, 70, 60, 50, 40,

V2[5]Value[6]n 25
V1[7]Value[8]n
VInsp [9]n 2 Units: [cm/s] Speed value.

AN
V00[10]Value [11]n Default value: 250

V0 [12]n Default value: YES Validates the speed level.
3
Acceleration [13]
NO, YES
Jerk (14)
4 Units: [cm/s] Speed value.
Default value: 200

Device Control

5 Default value: YES Validates the speed level.
NO, YES

12
Default value: 160
7 Default value: YES Validates the speed level.
NO, YES
12
Default value: 100
20
Default value: 60
10 Default value: NO Validates the speed level.

G_
NO, YES
Default value: 3
IN
Default value: 10
FT
13 Default value: 70 Value of acceleration during lift start

14 Jerk value during lift start (is not operative)).

5.3.3 TIMES
LI
Parameters associated to the time control.
AG
_T

*5.3.3. TIMES * 1 Units: [s] Maximum running time. Associated with the detection of

ER
Max travelling[1]s Default value: 60 fault number 800 (see Faults List).
Max levelling [2]s
2 Units: [s] Maximum levelling time. Associated with the detection of
Max.Lev.0ing_W[3]s Default value: 30 fault number 801 (see Faults List).
Inc.0ing [4]d
IN
Re-levelling 3 Units: [s] Maximum levelling time during zeroing process or lift well
[5]s Default value: 35 exploration. Associated with the detection of faults
T.Max.Resc [6]s number 802, 805 and 806 (see Faults List).
RD
Stop Vinsp [7]d Units: [s/10] Inoperative.

Stop Vmax [8]d
4 Default value: 45
Stop V0 [9]d
Units: [s] Maximum time to perform one self-re-levelling movement.
GA
Outside DZ [10]s 5
Delay P32 [11]s Default value: 5 Associated with anomalies number 2100 and 2150 (see
Delay P35 [12]s Faults List).
Delay P36 [13]d 6 Units: [s] Only electric drives. Maximum time of journey to nearest
Y_
Travel t. [14]d Default value: 50 floor with the auxiliary rescue system (movement type
Del. Relevel. [15]d RESCUE). Associated with the detection of anomaly
Contac.Drop [16]d number 2271 (See Anomalies List).
ON
7 Units: [s/10] Minimum time interval between stop and next start up
Default value: 30 when the travelling speed was Vinsp.
TH
Default value: 50 when the travelling speed was higher than Visnp.
when the travelling speed was V0 o V00.
AN
Default value: 20
10 Units: [s] Maximum time of car parked outside the door zone.
Default value: 4 Associated with fault number 290 (see Faults List).
11 Units: [s] Delay for detecting fault number 2.

Default value: 5

Device Control

12 Units: [s] Delay for detecting fault number 4.
Default value: 60
13 Units: [s/10] Delay for confirming P36 before lift start. (This prevents

12
Range: 0..10 door lock bounces from switching over the contactors.)
Default value: 1
14 Units: [s/10] Delay that must lapse at the up starts of hydraulically-

12
Default value: 15 driven lifts before beginning to detect the non-movement
of the car, associated with faults number 801, 806, 850 ,
851, 852, 853 and with anomalies number 2000, 2050,
20
2100, 2150. (See Faults List). (increases the time of the
associated parameters). Recommended value for hydraulic
lifts: 100D. Delay that must lapse, whatever the start
direction and type of drive, before activating the function
G_
that monitors failure number 804.
15 Units: [s/10] Delay for starting self-re-levelling with the door open.
Range: 0..10 Prevents quick oscillations of the car from generating re-
IN
levelling.
Default value: 1
16 Units: [s/10] With variable drives (electric and hydraulic), the
contactors are switched off at the end of this time after
FT
Default value: 10
the stop point. During this lapse of time, speed must
decrease to zero without interruption of power supply to
the motor.
LI
With non-variable hydraulic drives, this is the delay for de-
energising the solenoid valve VMP after the stop point.
5.3.4 CONTROLS
AG
Controls for the vertical movement.

_T
5.3.4.1 VAR.DRV.
ER
5.3.4.1.1 GENERAL
IN

RD

*5.3.4.1.1. GENERAL* 1 Default value: NO [NO/PIC/REG]Type of control of speed less than 0.3m/s.
Control V03 [1] NO, PIC, REG Necessary for movements with doors open (Self-re-
GA
Fine Lev Type [2] levelling and Pre-opening) in variable drives. Associated
Enables V00 [3] with faults 602, 603 and anomalies 1804, 1805 and 2400.
[NO]: No control.
Y_
[PIC]: Control signal supplied by the control PIC (type II).

[REG]: Control signal supplied by the speed regulator.
2 Default value: HARD HARD: Switches CIFS,CIFB are used for inching (at speed

ON
HARD, SOFT V00)

SOFT: Inching is performed with switches CIFS, CIFB.
Positioning system must be type II (encoder on the over
TH
speed governor).
In both cases:
The drive must be closed loop V3F (DRV Type: T_V3F_2C
AN
(5.3.1))
Parameter 'V00' (5.3.2) must be on.
The control must include a device for movement with
doors open.
Parameter 'Relevel DO' (5.5.3.1) must be enabled.

Device Control
5.3.4.2 THER
Over temperature thermostat of the motor.
12
*5.3.4.2. THER * 1 Default value: NO Controls the emergency stop due to thermal probe
THER Immediate [1] NO, YES activation during the floor-to-floor and recovery journey.
12
Delay THER [2]s [NO]: Permits completing the current floor-to-floor
Value R (3)o journey.
Value ROn [4]o [YES]: Produces an emergency stop after the delay
Value ROff [5]o
20
defined by 'Delay THER' (5.3.4.2).
NumReadings [6]
2 Units: [s] Delay for emergency stop during floor-to-floor journeys or
Del.Fault THER[7]d
THER Fa.Aut.Rec [8]
Default value: 0 recovery further to the actuation of thermostat.
G_
It is active only if parameter 'THER Immediate' is enabled.
3 Units: [Ohms] Ohms of the thermal probe of the motor

IN
4 Units: [Ohms] Analog reading of the engine thermostat.. Upper limit at
Default value: 4500 which the analog input variable of the traction motor
thermostat turns on, in ohms.
FT
5 Units: [Ohms] Analog reading of the engine thermostat.. Lower limit at
Default value: 2500 which the analog input variable of the traction motor
thermostat turns off, in ohms.
Range: 0..255 Analog reading of the engine thermostat.. Number of
6 Default value: 16
LI
consecutive measurements either below the lower limit or
above the upper limit, necessary to toggle the variable
status.
AG
7 Units: [s/10] Delay from the activation of the failure of thermostat to
Default value: 150 the activation of out of service and clearing of calls in
progress.
_T
8 Default value: YES Allows automatic recovery of the damage if the motor
NO, YES thermostat reaches a safe temperature.
ER
5.3.4.3 BRK CONTROL

Control of the brake.
IN

RD

*5.3.4.3. BRK CONTR* 1 Default value: NO Validate the brake control. It is controlled the state of the
BR Control [1] NO, C_1, C_2, C_3, arms of the brake in rest and on way.
GA
BR Del. T. [2]d C_4 [NO]: There is not brake control.

FR1 T. [3]d
[C_1]: The arms of the control are only controlled by the
BR Logic Inp. [4] entrance E9 (PBCM). Serial or parallel reading of the arms
Sec.Cut Ctrl. [5]
Y_
of the brake.
Desact.Fail.BR (6)
N.Star.Fa.FR [7] [C_2]: Brake with two arms. Individual reading of the
brake arms. Entrances E9 and E6 of PBCM.
ON
[C_3]: Brake with three arms. Individual reading of the

brake arms. Entrances E9, E6 and E7 of PBCM.
[C_4]: Brake with four arms. Individual reading of the
TH
brake arms. Entrances E9, E6, E7 and E8 of PBCM.

2 Units: [s/10] Delay from the start for confirmation of the brake braking
Default value: 30 on way (345).
AN
3 Units: [s/10] Minimum time for the detection of the brake fault braking
Default value: 10 on way (345)
4 Default value: N_O Logic of the entrances of the contacts of the control.
N_O, N_C

Device Control

5 Default value: P36 Control for detecting short cuts in the safety circuit.
NO, ACC, P36 [NO]: Doesn't make any control.
[ACC]: It controls every 16 ms if any contactor has
dropped because of a short cut in the safety circuit.
12
[P36]: It controls every 4 ms if the auxiliary relay
connected to P36 has dropped.
12
This relay is read through input CO (J22) of PBCM.
6 NO, YES [YES] allows temporarily disabling damage control brake.
Instead, it continues to carry out state control of brake
20
anomalies indicated by (AN 2347, 2348) but keeps the
equipment in service for 'N.Star.Fa.FR'.
7 Maximum number of starts may be performed when brake

G_
abnormalities were detected (AN 2347, 2348).When the
number of starts reaches 0, there is a brake failure and
the unit is out of service. It can be configured with a
maximum value of 550 cycles.
IN
5.3.4.4 RESCUE
Type of rescue system.
FT
LI Description
*5.3.4.4. RESCUE * 1 Default value: NULL Type of rescue in case of power supply failure.

AG
Type Rescue [1] NULL: Null value [NULL]: None.
Tmax Resc [2]s
MAC: Mac address [MAC]: Rescue with regulator specific to rescue
T. CEM1 [3]d
Q: Real address procedure.
_T
T. CEM2 [4]d
CEM1_2 Read [5] UP: Only for type I [Q]: Rescue with own regulator. The direction for rescue
Logic ECEM [6] is determined by the car load (greater or less than 50 per
DOWN: Only for types cent).
Delay UPS [7]s II & III
ER
Rescue Emer.UPS [8] [UP]: Rescue with own regulator. Direction for rescue is
REG: Safety Rescue. UP.
Resc.Hydr.Monop.[9] This comment can be
too long and have many [DOWN]: Rescue with own regulator. Direction for rescue
IN
lines. in DOWN.
[REG]: Rescue with own regulator. Direction for rescue
selected by the regulator according to the car load
RD
condition.
2 Units: [s] Only electric drives. Maximum time of journey to nearest
Default value: 50 floor with the auxiliary rescue system (movement type
GA
RESCUE). Associated with the detection of anomaly

number 2271 (See Anomalies List).
3 Units: [s/10] Time for confirming the reading of contactor CEM1 at lift
start
Y_
Default value: 6
4 Units: [s/10] Delay of contactors input after confirming the reading of
Default value: 30 contactor CEM1
ON
5 Default value: EXT5 Type of automatic rescue:

NULL, EXT5, PQ, [NULL]: there is no
PBCM [EXT5]: CEM contact is read and activated from Ext5.15
TH
[PQ]: CEM contact is read and activated from the Orona's

Load Device
[PBCM]: CEM contact is read and activated from PBCM
AN
6 Default value: N_C EXT 5:. Input E1.

N_O, N_C
7 Units: [s] Delay for UPS activation in case of power supply failure
Default value: 120

Device Control

8 Default value: NO It allows to do emergency movement without power
NO, YES supply, using an UPS.
Only for regulated electric drives with rescue contactors
CN/CEM.
12
9 Default value: NO
NO, YES
12
5.3.4.5 MRTEMP
Machine room temperature
20
Embedded in the main board on the controller. Only for production stage.
G_
IN
*5.3.4.5. MRTEMP * 1 Default value: TYPE1 Type of temperature measuring transducer.
Type NTC [1] TYPE1, TYPE2, TYPE3
Value RTCM (2)o
2 Units: [Ohms] Value of the temperature transducer in Ohms

FT
Value TCM (3)c
Value TI [4]c
3 Units: [s/100] Value of the temperature transducer in C
Value TS [5]c
Rhyst [6]
NumReadings
Enable TI
[7]
[8]
4 Units: [s/100]
Default value: 255
LIAnalog reading of the machine room thermostat.. Low
temperature of machine room. .
Enable TS [9] 5 Units: [s/100] Analog reading of the machine room thermostat.. High

AG
FCTCMAQ [10] Default value: 255 temperature of machine room.
MRTemp_read [11]
6 Default value: 64 Analog reading of the machine room thermostat..
Inverter Temp (12) Hysteresis used to calculate the upper and lower limits,
_T
Enable Fan [13] the high and low temperatures..

Lim.Act.Fan [14]
7 Range: 0..255 Analog reading of the machine room thermostat.. Number
Default value: 16 of consecutive measurements either below the lower limit
ER
or above the upper limit, necessary to toggle the variable

status..
8 Default value: YES [YES]: Validates the input associated with the machine-

IN
NO, YES room over temperature sensor, in connection with failure

number 307.
9 Default value: YES [YES]: Validates the input associated with the machine-

RD
NO, YES room over temperature sensor, in connection with failure

number 329.
10 Default value: 4 Correction factor of temperature in the machine room. It
is the difference between the ambient temperature in the
GA
machine room and the temperature measured by the NTC

onto the PBCM. The correction factor for laboratory
conditions is 4C.
Y_
11 Default value: MAX Value of temperature in the machine room:

PB, REG, MAX PB: measured by the NTC in the Mother Board PBCM
REG: measured in the inverter
ON
MAX: maximum of both measured in the Mother Board

and in the inverter
TH
12 Matrix of Load weigh inputs. Inverter temperature.

13 Default value: NO [YES] Fan is activated (J10 PBCM) in case temperature in
NO, YES the machine room is higher than 'Lim.Act.Vent.'.
AN
14 Default value: 35 Upper limit for temperature in the machine room to

activate the fan.
5.3.4.7 24 VOLTS
Parameters associated to the analog reading of the 24V.

Device Control

*5.3.4.7. 24 VOLTS * 1 Units: [s/10] 24V supply voltage of board PBCM
Value V24 (1)d
Units: [s/10] Analog reading of the 24V voltage.. Upper limit at which
12
Value Von [2]d 2
Value Voff [3]d Default value: 180 the 24V analog input variable turns on.
NumReadings [4]
3 Units: [s/10] Analog reading of the 24V voltage.. Lower limit at which

12
Default value: 160 the 24V analog input variable turns off.
4 Range: 0..255 Analog reading of the 24V voltage.. Number of

Default value: 2 consecutive measurements either below the lower limit or
20
above the upper limit, necessary to toggle the variable
status.
5.3.4.9 SECURITY CHAIN
G_
Parameters associated to the safety circuit.
IN
FT
*5.3.4.9. SECURITY * 1 Default value: NO [YES]: In electric drives, failure '1' FA_NO_P32_RUNNING
MemP32Running [1] NO, YES is of the stored type. For commissioning, the CT's function
FAULT RECOV 1.5 must be activated.
LI
Default value: [NO]
AG
5.3.4.A DOORS OPEN
Parameters associated to the vertical movement with doors open.
_T

ER

*5.3.4.A. DOORS OPE* 1 Default value: YES (YES) Relay C of circuit PPS is deenergised in floor-to-floor
Enable Desact C [1] NO, YES journeys
IN
Levelling DO [2]
2 Default value: NO [YES]: Enables the self-levelling function with open door
Relevel. DO [3] NO, YES (door pre-opening).
RD
NO, YES (case of hydraulic lifts and inching with V3F drives).
5.3.4.C SMOKE CNTR

GA
Smoke control parameters. Used in Belgium.

Y_

ON
*5.3.4.C. SMOKE CNT* 1 Default value: NO Enables the smoke control function.
EnableSmokeCntrl[1] NO, YES
LogicInputSC [2]
TH
2 Default value: N_O EXT 5:. Input E1.

Mov Fire Smoke [3] N_O, N_C
3 Default value: NO Enables fireman moving in smoke condition.
AN
NO, YES
Smoke control parameters.

Device Control
5.3.4.F DESCON. REGULADOR

For disconnection of the controller parameters
12
*5.3.4.F. DESCON. R* 1 Default value: NO Activate the power saving function by disconnecting the
regulator (vertical drive) when the device is in repose for
12
Descon.REG.CN [1] NO, YES
T.Descon.CN [2]m a while.
T.ALREG.CN ON [3]d Units: [min] Minimum time (in minutes) that the lift has to be on
2
T.ALREG.CN OFF[4]d standby to turn off the regulator (power saving feature).
20
Default value: 5
3 Units: [s/10] Time to check that the CN contactor to drive off properly
Default value: 60 tilted OFF to ON.
G_
AN 2345 anomaly is detected when there is an order that
does not turn on the set time has elapsed.
4 Units: [s/10] Time to check that the CN contactor to drive off properly

IN
Default value: 100 tilted from ON to OFF.
AN 2346 anomaly is detected if when there is a shutdown
command that does not turn off the set time has elapsed.
FT
5.3.5 HYDRAULIC
Parameters related to the hydraulic drives.
5.3.5.1 GENERAL
LI
General parameters of hydraulic drives.
AG
_T

*5.3.5.1. GENERAL * 1 Default value: S_D Inoperative
[1]
ER
Type Start DIR, S_D, SOFT

Starting Time [2]d
2 Units: [s/10] At the star-delta start of hydraulic drives, this is the time
Time Home Land.[3]m Default value: 15 the star contactor CS is on.
T.MAX LLH [4]m
IN
Val.Microniv.Aux[5] At the start of hydraulic drives with a softstarter (SOFT),

Ret.Niv.S(16ms)[6] this is the delay in energising the solenoid valves (non-
Ret.IsonS(16ms)[7] variable) or the speed levels (variable), with respect to the
switching of the contactors on.
RD
Central HID [8]

3 Units: [min] Time of return to lower terminal floor of hydraulically-
Default value: 14 driven lifts.
GA
4 Units: [min] Maximum duration of travel to lower terminal floor,

Default value: 10 associated with failure number 803
5 Default value: NO [YES] Auxiliary re-levelling device. For Soft-Starter

Y_
NO, YES hydraulics drivers.
6 Default value: 0 The stop point in a levelling movement in up direction is

delayed a time T milliseconds. T is equal to the value of
ON
the parameter multiplied by 16. Application: hydraulic

drives with reduced speed to avoid frequents re-levelling.
7 Default value: 0 The stop point in a re-levelling movement in up direction

TH
is delayed a time T milliseconds. T is equal to the value of

the parameter multiplied by 16. Application: in hydraulic
drivers, it is used to get a good stop accuracy in the re-
AN
levelling movement (low hysteresis of CS switch).

8 Default value: BUC Hydraulic Type.
BUC, GMV BUC: Bucher
GMV: GMV
5.4 POSITIONING
Parameters related to the car positioning system.
Device Control
5.4.1 POS.TYPE
Selection of the type positioning system.
12
*5.4.1. POS.TYPE * 1 Default value: II Selects the positioning type used.
Pos.Type [1] I, II, III [I]: Type 1 (with no encoder on over speed governor)
12
Reading COCU [2]
[II]: Type 2 (with encoder on over speed governor)
Timeout EXT4_0 [3]
[III]: Type 3 (with encoder on over speed governor). Only
for M33 Optimized.
20
2 Default value: EXT4 [PB] Reading CO/CU is done through inputs CO/CU on
PB, EXT4 Master Board (J22).
[EXT4] Reading CO/CU is done through extension 4.0 and
G_
is transmitted to the CPU through the CAN bus.
3 Default value: 2 Time to disable extension 4.0 Measuring base of 0.5 sec.

IN
5.4.2 TYPE I
Parameters for the Type I positioning system.
FT
Without encoder in the over speed governor. With intermediate magnets for speed changing
points.
LI
AG
*5.4.2. TYPE I * 1 Units: [s] This is the maximum time of car in motion between
T. in CS_CB [1]s Default value: 5 magnets CS / CB, associated with faults number 850 and
_T
T. out CS_CB [2]s 851

2 Units: [s] In positioning type I: this is the maximum time of car
Default value: 40 travelling outside the magnets CS / CB. Associated with
ER
faults number 852 and 853
5.4.3 TYPE II, III

IN
Parameters for the Type II and III positioning systems.

With encoder on pulley of the over speed governor. The speed changing point is given by
RD
parameters of decelerating distance.

5.4.3.1 DEC./STOPPING DIST.
GA
Parameters for decelerating and stopping distances.

Y_

ON
*5.4.3.1. DEC./STOP* 1 Default value: 40 This is the distance from switching on of switch CO to the
Distance CO [1] levelling point of the lower terminal floor.
Distance CU [2] Is updated at lift well exploration.
Dist_Up_Vins[3]
TH
Must be greater than DIST_DN_VMAX

Dist_Dn_Vins[4]
Dist_V1 [5] 2 Default value: 40 This is the distance from switching on of switch CU to the
Dist_V2 [6]
levelling point of the upper terminal floor.
AN
Dist_V3 [7] Is updated at lift well exploration.

Dist_Up_Vmax[8] Must be greater than DIST_UP_VMAX
Dist_Dn_Vmax[9]
3 This is the deceleration distance in up direction from level
Dist_V00 [10]p
VINSP. It must be greater than Dist_DZ_runnin. It must
Hyst_V00 [B]p be less than DistMIN_Vins

Device Control

Dist_Lev.P [12]p 4 This is the deceleration distance in down direction from
Dist_V0 [13]p level VINSP. It must be greater than Dist_DZ_runnin. It
DistSegCV [14] must be less than DistMIN_Vins
5 Deceleration distance in up direction.
12
12
8 Default value: 37 This is the maximum speed deceleration distance in the

up direction, of level Vmax.
20
Must be less than or equal to 'Distance CO'.
Must be less than 'DistMIN_Vmax'
Default value: 37 This is the maximum speed deceleration distance in the
G_
9 down direction, of level Vmax.
Must be less than or equal to 'Distance CO'.
IN
Must be less than 'DistMIN_Vmax'
10 Units: [pulses] Distance in pulses from the levelling point to the inching
Default value: 5 zone start point.
FT
B Units: [pulses] Number of pulses for lag of inching stop point (speed
Default value: 1 V00) with respect to the end of the inching zone
12 Units: [pulses]
Default value: 19
LI
Distance in pulses from the stop points of levelling speed
V0 to the levelling point.
13 Units: [pulses] Distance from the stop points (speed level V0) to the

AG
Default value: 15 levelling point.
Where there are more than two stops, this value is
adjusted to those of floor 1 during the lift well exploration.
_T
14 Default value: 0 Not used.

5.4.3.2 TRAVEL DIST.
ER
Parameters for the minimal distances necessaries for making a travel at a certain speed.
IN

RD
*5.4.3.2. TRAVEL DI* 1 Minimum travel distance.

DistMin_V0 [1]
DistMIN_Vins [2] 2 Minimum travel distance.
GA
DistMIN_V1 [3]
DistMIN_V2 [4] 3 Minimum travel distance.
DistMIN_V3 [5]
Minimum travel distance.
Y_
DistMIN_Vmax [6] 4
5 Minimum travel distance.
ON
6 Minimum travel distance.
5.4.3.3 D.Z. DIST.

TH
Parameters related to distances of the door zones.

AN

*5.4.3.3. D.Z. DIST* 1 Default value: 1 At any points at a distance less than this distance from
Dist_DZ_at res[1] the levelling point, car door opening is allowed with
vertical movement at rest.

Device Control

Dist_DZ_runnin[2] 2 Default value: 3 At any points at a distance less than this distance from
the levelling point, car door opening is allowed during
levelling.
Must be less than DIST_UP_VINSP
12
Must be less than DIST_DN_VINSP
5.4.3.4 VAR.DIST.
12
20
G_
*5.4.3.4. VAR.DIST.* 1 Default value: 126 This is the travel of the car in the lift well corresponding to
Centi.mm/pulse [1] one pulse of the encoder and the car travel.
Encoder Rot. [2] Value = (Diameter of governor pulley (mm) x 100 x
IN
ERROR CS/CB [3] 3.1416) / (4 x Number of disc slots)
ERROR CO CU [4]
2 Default value: Dir1 With this parameter, the control can be adapted to the
ERROR Overrunn[5] Dir0, Dir1 two types of pulse phase shifts of the over speed
FT
ERROR P_S/P_B.[6] governor encoder (A,B).
Dist.CM.Max [7]
Dist.ContraM [8] 3 Default value: 1 The maximum error between the position of stop points
Inc_Dmin_Insp [9]
determined during lift well exploration and those read
Default value: 6
LI
during normal operation. Associated with faults number
905 and 906.
This is the maximum error margin between the toggling
4
AG
position of switches (magnets) CO /CU determined during
lift well exploration and the positions read in normal
operation Associated with faults number 900 - 901- 903 -
904.
_T
5 Default value: 0 The maximum distance from the levelling point to the
actual stop point. Associated with faults number 2402 and
2403.
ER
6 Default value: 2
Type II: Maximum permissible distance from stop point
running up to stop point running down at each floor.
IN
Type III: Maximum permissible distance from CSB low

point running up to CSB up point running down at each
floor.
RD
It is detected during lift well exploration. Associated with

failure number 907.
7 Default value: 0 If reverse motion at lift start is bigger than this parameter,

GA
speed change misadjusted accordingly.

8 Default value: 2 The maximum permissible reverse motion distance.
Associated with faults number 310 and 311.
Y_
9 Default value: 6 Safety increase in minimum travel distance at level Vinsp.

during inspection and emergency services.
ON
5.4.4 COMMON I, II, III

Common parameters to the types I, II and III.
TH

AN

*5.4.4. COMMON I, I* 1 Range: 1..10 This must state the number of magnets CS (Type II) /
Magnets CS in CU[1] Default value: 2 CSB (Type III) there are above the upper magnet (zone
Magnets CB in CO[2] CU). This number must coincide with the value detected
by the switches at 3.4.5 of CT.

Device Control

2 Range: 1..10 This must state the number of magnets CB (Type II) /
Default value: 1 CSB (Type III) there are below the lower magnet (zone
CO). This number must coincide with the value detected
12
5.5 ENTRANCE DOORS
Parameters related to the control of the car door operator.
12
5.5.1 OPERATOR
20
G_
*5.5.1. OPERATOR * 1 Default value: PA_V3F Selects the type of door operator for entrance 1. PA_V3F -

IN
Entrance 1[1] PA_V3F OR_TRI - TRI_LCP - ARTICUL - RC24 - PEIGN - GAL -
Entrance 2[2] MAN - ARTICUL2
OR_TRI
TRI_LCP
FT
ARTICUL
RC24
PEIGN
GAL
LI
MAN
AG
ARTICUL2
2 Default value: PA_V3F Selects the type of door operator for entrance 2. PA_V3F -
PA_V3F OR_TRI - TRI_LCP - ARTICUL - RC24 - PEIGN - GAL -
_T
MAN - ARTICUL2
OR_TRI
TRI_LCP
ER
ARTICUL
RC24
PEIGN
IN
GAL
MAN
ARTICUL2
RD
5.5.2 TIMES
GA
5.5.2.1 DOOR OPEN

Y_

ON

*5.5.2.1. DOOR OPEN* 1 Units: [s/10] This is the door dwell time corresponding to a car call.
TH
Car call [1]d Default value: 40

Land./VIP call[2]d
2 Units: [s/10] This is the door dwell time corresponding to a landing or
Car/Ex call [3]d VIP call.
AN
Open PB [4]d Default value: 40

Reopening [5]d 3 Units: [s/10] This is the door dwell time applicable when answering a
Cancel_DOT_UNI [6] Default value: 50 car call and a landing call simultaneously.
Rest_DO [7]d
Car.Call.VIP [8]d 4 Units: [s/10] Door dwell time corresponding to pushbutton AP
Default value: 20

Device Control

5 Units: [s/10] This is the door dwell time corresponding to the actuation
Default value: 20 of a reopening signal IR/IRM (photocell or mechanical
barrier/reopening).
6 Default value: NO [YES]: In universal traffic control, time TPA is cancelled
12
NO, YES when pushing any car call button.
7 Units: [s/10] If no call is assigned to the car after the door dwell time,
this delay must pass before closing starts for parking with
12
Default value: 30
closed door.
8 Units: [s/10]

20
Default value: 40
5.5.2.2 OTHERS
G_
IN
*5.5.2.2. OTHERS * 1 Units: [min] Time for detecting faults number 202 , 203, 208, 209
FT
PER_IR_Detect [1]m Default value: 2 (door reopening IR1, IR2, IRM1, IRM2 activated
t_nop35t [2]d permanently).
Open_delay [3]d Units: [s/10] In the event of a manual landing door, this sets the time
2
Closing_delay [4]d
AB Parity T. [5]d
Default value: 40 LI
granted to the user getting in the car to press the car call
button (priority to directional trend).
3 Units: [s/10] Delay of door opening. (Only for opening after a journey)

AG
Range: 0..10 Introducing 2 as the parameter value can make the doors
open if the LAP contact bounces at stopping.
Default value: 0
_T
4 Units: [s/10] Produces a door closing delay equal to the parameter

Range: 0..10 value only when point P35 (closing of manual landing
door) is activated. Introducing 2 as the parameter value
Default value: 1 will avoid problems with the door lock when closing the
ER
manual landing door.

5 Units: [s/10] Time for detection of imparity faults.
Default value: 5
IN
5.5.3 FUNCTIONS
RD
5.5.3.1 GENERAL
GA

Y_

*5.5.3.1. GENERAL * 1 Default value: 1 Number of entrances
ON
Num.Entrances [1]
Relevel DO [2] 2 Default value: NO [YES]: Enables the self-levelling function with open door
Levelling DO [3] NO, YES (case of hydraulic lifts and inching with V3F drives).
TH
Num.Max.Reopen. [4]
Ena.IR.Insp/Emer[5] NO, YES (door pre-opening).
IR EnableRedirec[6]
[7] Default value: 10 Is the number of consecutive reopening that have to
AN
Car Stop PB 4
Double COP [8] occur in order to detect faults number 200 and 201.
Door reversal [9] Default value: NO Setting [NO] cancels the detection of the door reopening
5
Local Reopening [10] signals.(IR: photocell and IRM: mechanical reopening,
NO, YES
Floor DoorType[11] during the inspection or Emergency services. Permits car
travels with no door operator installed.

Device Control

6 Default value: NO Only hydraulic drives[NO]: IR is not active during door
NO, YES closing for return to the lower terminal floor, after the
time 'Time Home land.' (See menu 5.3.5) plus one
minute. inic_activaciones. (Application only to goods lifts,
12
car lifts) [YES]: IR is active during door closing for return
to the lower terminal floor as . stated above. IR
photoelectric return switches
12
7 Default value: NO [YES]: The car control station includes a stop switch. This
NO, YES fulfils the 'open door' function.
8 Default value: NO [YES]: Only if there are two car control stations. Permit

20
NO, YES simultaneous turning on of the car call indicators having
the same function (same Landing, same Entrance and
different Pushbutton) See menus 5.8.3 and 5.8.4.
G_
9 Default value: NO [YES] Application: car-lift.
NO, YES Input E2 of extensions 1 (J3) is connected to a door-
reversal device installed at the landing.
IN
10 Default value: NO Indicates if the door reopening is operating in local
SI, NO mode(EXT3 decision) or it is commanded by Main
Controller. Only for extensions 3.
FT
11 Default value: AUTO Type of floor door. Used to consider cases of manual
AUTO, MANU doors for filtering autodialler. In the event of automatic
doors, as floor and car door operate together, it is not
possible for a person to become trapped inside the car
LI
without being able to make an alarm call. However, in the
case of manual doors, it can be the case that the cam
doesnt allow the floor door to open, even with
AG
P35deactivated. In which case, the user will be locked in
and unable to make an alarm call. AUTO: Automatic door.
MANU: Manual door.
_T
5.5.3.2 NUDGING
Parameters related to closing door movement at slow speed to overcome an abnormal
ER
resistance.
IN

*5.5.3.2. NUDGING * 1 Default value: NO [YES]: Validates the constrained closing nugging function.
RD
Enable Nugging [1] NO, YES This function is activated when there are attempts to start
IRM in Nugging [2] (calls to other floors) and a user impedes the lift to start
AP in Nugging [3] during time T.nugging by preventing the doors closing.
GA
T.Nugging [4]s When this function is enabled, reopening IR1/2 are

Limit Nugging [5] inactive.
2 Default value: NO [YES]: Mechanical door reopening (IRM1/2) is active

Y_
NO, YES during the nugging function.
3 Default value: NO YES: The door open pushbutton is active during the
NO, YES nugging function.
ON
4 Units: [s] This is the time for enabling the nugging function.
Default value: 20
TH
5 Default value: 10 The number of consecutive nugging closings necessary to

detect anomaly number 1809.
5.5.4 FA.TIMES
AN
Fault times

Device Control

*5.5.4. FA.TIMES * 1 Units: [s/10] Maximum permissible door opening or closing time before
Max Door T. [1]d Default value: 100 tripping the following alarms:
Recov.IR.Lock [2]m Number 5: Tmax closing
Lock.Rec. T. [3]m
Number 1400 : Tmax opening
12
Recov.LAP OFF [4]m
Max Door T.Me[5]d 2 Units: [min] This is the time necessary for recovering the out-of-
Default value: 30 service condition resulting from failure Consecutive
Reopening (number 200 and 201). At each new trial, this
12
time increases by its own value.
3 Units: [min] This is the dwell time between two consecutive series of
trials to recover door lock faults. At each new series of
20
Default value: 1
trials, this time increases by its value.
4 Units: [min] This is the time for recovering the out-of-service condition
Default value: 30 created by failure LAP OFF (number 1400 to 1531).
G_
5 Units: [s/10] Is the maximal time allowed (in case of compensatory
Default value: 150 measures) opening or closing one door before activating
the following faults:
IN
Number 5: Tmax closing
Number 1400 : Tmax opening
FT
5.5.5 ENTRANCE TABLE
Configuration of the entrance opening of each level in case of double entrance.
LI
AG
*5.5.5. ENTRANCE TA* 1 Default value: YES Access 1 enabled.
Level0)A1[1]A2 [2] NO, YES
_T
Level1)A1[]A2 []
2 Default value: NO Access 2 enabled.
Level2)A1[]A2 [] NO, YES
...
ER
Level63)A1[]A2[]
5.5.6 IND.OP.TABLE
IN
Independent Opening Table

RD

GA
*5.5.6. IND.OP.TABL* 1 Default value: NORMAL Floor type: NORMAL (access 1 and 2 open
Level 0 [1] NORMAL together)/SPECIAL (independent opening of access 1 and
Level 1 [] 2).
SPECIAL
Level 2 []
Y_
...
Level 63 []
ON
5.5.8 OPER.PARAM.
Parameters related to each type of operator.
TH
Default value:
PA_V3F: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (YES) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
AN
(YES) - IR running (NO) - Tree phase (NO)

OR_TRI: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (NO) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
(YES) - IR running (NO) - Tree phase (YES)
TRI_LCP: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (NO) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
(YES) - IR running (NO) - Tree phase (YES)

Device Control
ARTICUL: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (NO) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
RC24: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (YES) - Closing running (NO) - Automatic entrance
PEIGN: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (NO) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
12
(YES) - IR running (] - Tree phase (NO)
GAL: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (YES) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
(YES) - IR running (] - Tree phase (NO)
12
MANU: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (NO) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
(NO) - IR running (YES) - Tree phase (NO)
20
ARTICUL2: LCP-Acc (NO) - For.Clos.Entr (NO) - Closing running (YES) - Automatic entrance
G_
IN
*5.5.8. OPER.PARAM.* 1 Default value: NO [YES]: Validates the contact of the door closing limit
LCP Entr1 [1] NO, YES switch at entrance 1.
LCP Entr2 [2]
Default value: NO [YES]: Validates the contact of the door closing limit
FT
For.Clos.Entr1 [3] 2 NO, YES switch at entrance 2.
For.Clos.Entr2 [4]
Entrance 1 AUT [5] 3 Default value: YES [YES]: Validates the constrained closing output that

Entrance 2 AUT [6]
Closing1 running[7]
Closing2 running[8] 4
NO, YES
Default value: YES
LI
controls door operator at entrance 1.
[YES]: Validates the constrained closing output that

NO, YES controls door operator at entrance 2.
3-phase_1 [9]
AG
3-phase_2 [10] 5 Default value: YES [YES]: Validates the existence of a self-closing door at
IR1 running [11] NO, YES entrance 1.
IR2 running [12]
_T
6 Default value: YES [YES]: Validates the existence of a self-closing door at

NO, YES entrance 2.
7 Default value: YES [YES]: Activates the output for closing doors during the lift

ER
NO, YES travel, at entrance 1 (priority to LCP).
8 Default value: YES [YES]: Activates the output for closing doors during the lift
NO, YES travel, at entrance 2 (priority to LCP).
IN
9 Default value: NO [YES]: Entrance 1 with three-phase motor.

NO, YES
RD
10 Default value: NO [YES]: Entrance 2 with three-phase motor

NO, YES
11 Default value: NO Validates retrocession activation due to boarding photocell

GA
NO, YES 1, when the car is moving (for cars without doors).
12 Default value: NO Validates retrocession activation due to boarding photocell

NO, YES 2, when the car is moving (for cars without doors).
Y_
5.6 SIGNS
ON
Parameters related to signalling features of the lift installation.

5.6.1 POSITION INDIC.
TH
It allows the selection of the indicator type.

5.6.1.1 INDICATOR TYPE
AN
It allows the selection of the indicator type.


Device Control

*5.6.1.1. INDICATOR* 1 Default value: NEWTDS Type of LSA line coding.
Type Indic [1] NEWTDS, TDS [TDS]: for indicators of TDS type.
[NEWTDS]: for indicators of NEWTDS type.
12
5.6.1.2 ARCAII TABLE
The 'New TDS' indicators for the ARCAII controller allow a personalised configuration of them
12
from the controller.
This menu allows the introduction of alphanumeric and special characters.
20
The special characters like the '-' or '+' signs, are in the key '1' of the CT.
To get the 'empty' character, select '0' and 'AV PAG' or 'RE PAG'.
G_
The keys 'AV PAG' and 'RE PAG' of the CT allow to select the wanted character.
The letters shown in the different CT keys are obtained in the same way.
IN
FT
*5.6.1.2. ARCAII TA* 1 Default value: ' ' Left character of position indicator.
Level 0)Left[1]Rt[2]
Level 1)Left[]Rt[]
Level 2)Left[]Rt[]
2 Default value: '0' LI Right character of position indicator.
...
AG
Level 63)Left[]R[]
5.6.1.3 TDS TABLE

_T
Table for the indicator type TDS.

Similar than the ARCA controller. The configuration of the special characters of the matrix
ER
indicators are programmed in the factory.

IN

RD
*5.6.1.3. TDS TABLE* 1 Range: 0..32 Number of pulses representing one character.
Level 0 [1] Default value: 2
Level 1 []
Level 2 []
GA
...
Level 31 []
Y_
5.6.1.4 FILL CONSEC.

If you enable this function or change parameter Main Floor Pos., the position indicator table is
updated as follows:
ON
In the logic position of Main Floor Pos.: _0

In the logic position of Main Floor Pos. + 1: _1
TH

In the logic position of Main Floor Pos. + 2: _2
etc.
AN
In the logic position of Main Floor Pos. - 1: _-1

In the logic position of Main Floor Pos. - 2: _-2
etc.

Device Control

*5.6.1.4. FILL CONS* 1 NO, YES Activates the function.
Enable? [1]
12
5.6.1.5 ARCA INDIC.
Parameters related to the indicators ARCA TDS.
12
20
*5.6.1.5. ARCA INDI* 1 Default value: Automatically selects the landing signalling table of the
TYPE IND. ARCA: CONSECUTIVE ARCA control: CONSECUTIVE / ACC.TO TABLE /
G_
[1] ALPHANUMERIC ALPHANUMERIC.
Enable? [2]
CONSECUTIVE
IN
ACC.TO TABLE
2 NO, YES Activates the function.
FT
5.6.1.6 POSI.TRAVELLING
Parameters related to the indication of the position when the car is travelling.
LI
AG
*5.6.1.6. POSI.TRAV* 1 Default value: LOG It allows different types of signalling through the position
Pos.Trav. [1] LOG, PROX, EMER Indicator:
_T
[LOG]: Displays the logical position.

[NEXT]: Displays the nearest floor.
[EMERGENCY]: No emergency floor displays while it is
ER
running.

IN
5.6.1.7 PISOS SIN SEN.MARCHA

RD

Mark
GA
No. Possible Values Description

*5.6.1.7. PISOS SIN* 1 Range: 0..15
Piso Emerg.[1][2]
Default value: NO
Y_
2 NO, YES
5.6.2 LANDING GONG

ON
Parameters related to the landing acoustic signals.

TH

AN
*5.6.2. LANDING GON* 1 Default value: Beginning of the time the gong and the voice synthesizer
EndVolMin [1] [09:00:00] sound at the maximum volume selected.
EndVolMax [2] Default value: End of the time the gong and the voice synthesizer
VolGongMin [3]
2 [21:00:00] sounds at the maximum volume selected.

Device Control

VolGongMax [4] 3 Default value: VOL1 Level of the gong's minimum volume
T1Gong [5] VOL10, VOL9, VOL8, Note: programming does not have an immediate effect
TtotGong [6] VOL7, VOL6, VOL5, See FaseProgVol.
VolProgPhase (7) VOL4, VOL3, VOL2,
12
T between gong[8]d VOL1
4 Default value: VOL10 Level of the gong's maximum volume
VOL10, VOL9, VOL8, Note: programming does not have an immediate effect
12
VOL7, VOL6, VOL5, See FaseProgVol.
VOL4, VOL3, VOL2,
VOL1
20
5 Default value: 8 Duration of first gong sound in a down journey.

6 Default value: 20 Total duration of gong sound.

G_
7 Indicates if programming the landing Gong volume is
done
IN
(0): Programming complete.
(Value other than 0): Programming in progress.
8 Units: [s/10] Delay between two cycles of gong. If the delay is too big,

FT
Default value: 10 some cycles can be lost.
5.6.3 ARROWS
Parameters related to the arrows.
LI
AG
_T
*5.6.3. ARROWS * 1 Default value: NO This parameter affects the landing arrow indicators and is
Enable Perm.Arro[1] NO, YES active only for traffic controls other than the universal
Car-Lift signals[2] one. Landing arrows always show the directional trend
(next direction) not to be mistaken for the current travel
ER
direction.
[NO]: Only the landing arrow at the floor where the car is
at rest or levelling turns on (next start arrow.)
IN
[YES]: All the landing arrows permanently show the status

of the lift directional setup.
If there is a landing gong, setting must be [NO].
RD
2 Default value: NO [YES] Application: car-lift.

NO, YES Nugging signal and cabin's arrows are used to centre the
car in the cabin.
GA
5.6.4 CONF.REG.
Y_
Confirming Call Registration

ON

*5.6.4. CONF.REG. * 1 Default value: 0 Indicates the sound level of the confirming call
TH
Volum. ZRP [1] registration. Only for extensions 1. Vol max:0 Vol
Time ZCRP [2]d min:100.
Deact.CRP [3] Units: [s/10] Beep time of the audible signal in tenths of a second. Only
2
AN
Time ZCRC [4]d for extensions 1 and 2..

Default value: 5
Deact.CRC [5]
3 Default value: AUT This parameter indicates if the buzzer is switched off by
AUT, MAN the extension or Main controller. Only for extensions 1.
4 Units: [s/10] Beep time of the audible signal in tenths of a second. Only
Default value: 5 for extensions 1 and 2..

Device Control

5 Default value: AUT This parameter indicates if the buzzer is switched off by
AUT, MAN the extension or Main controller. Only for extensions 1.
5.6.5 IN USE
12
Configuration of the function IN USE.
12
20
*5.6.5. IN USE * 1 Default value: DOWN Only for universal traffic.
Pilot? [1] UP, DOWN DOWN: Case of one-component landing control station
Flashing [2] (call pushbutton with in use indicator)
G_
Semaforos Montac[3]
UP: Case of two-component landing control station (call
Pil.Moder.Franci[4] pushbutton with call accepted (lift coming) indicator and
in use pilot lamp).
IN
Default value: [DOWN]
FT
2 Default value: YES Only for universal traffic.
NO, YES [YES]: Means the in use indicator is flashing while the car
is moving (It is steady when the car is at rest).
3 Default value: NO
LI [NO]: Means the in use indicator is not flashing.
Special signalling for car-lift:
NO, YES J1 Ext1.x Green led. Flickering, indicates that there is a
AG
call registered in that floor. When doors are opening
indicates that entry into car is allowed.
J2 Ext1.x Red led. Indicates that lift is busy and entry into
_T
car is not allowed.

4 Default value: NO Special signalling used for modernization devices in
NO, YES France. Affects floor button LED illumination. When
registering a floor call: If the lift is moving the LED
ER
corresponding to the pushbutton blinks. If the lift is

stationery, the LED remains on and constant.
IN
5.6.6 CAR GONG

Configuration of the cabin GONG.
RD

GA

*5.6.6. CAR GONG * 1 Default value: END_OP Sets when the car gong sounds:
Gong type [1] END_OP [END_OP]: End of door opening.
Y_
Gong Dur. [2]d

NXT_STP [NXT_STP]: A certain time after the beginning of door
Gong Ret. [3]d
NULL opening (from the closed position).
ON
2 Units: [s/10] Determines the duration of the car gong signal.

Default value: 10
3 Units: [s/10] Time to delay cabin's gong activation. Only if parameter

TH
Default value: 10 'Type Gong' is [NXT_STP] (5.6.6).
5.6.9 CAR ROOF

AN


Device Control

*5.6.9. CAR ROOF * 1 Default value: AUTO Operating mode of partial car lighting: AUTO, SW, PB
Partial Car Li[1] AUTO, PB, SW [AUTO]: Automatic
Car Fan [2]
[SW]: Switch on car control station
Car_Light_T. [3]m
12
Fan_T [4]m [PB]: Pushbutton on car control station
Car Light. DO [5] 2 Default value: AUTO Operating mode of car fan: AUTO, SW, PB
AUTO, PB, SW [AUTO]: Automatic
12
[SW]: Switch on car control station
[PB]: Pushbutton on car control station
Units: [min] Time (minutes) the auxiliary lighting remains on after the
20
3 Default value: 3 doors are at rest in the door zone.
4 Units: [min] Permits monitoring the time the fan remains on, when the

G_
Default value: 3 car is at rest. Output S5 extension 4.0.
5 Default value: NO [YES]: Auxiliary lighting turns off also when car park is
NO, YES with doors open.(It always turns off when parking with
IN
door closed.)
5.6.A TIME CONTROLS
FT
Time control for the gong's maximum and minimum programming.
LI Description
AG
*5.6.A. TIME CONTRO* 1 Default value: Beginning of the time the gong and the voice synthesizer
EndMinVol [1] [09:00:00] sound at the maximum volume selected.
EndMaxVol [2] Default value: End of the time the gong and the voice synthesizer
2 [21:00:00] sounds at the maximum volume selected.
_T
5.6.C FIREMAN
ER
Configuration in FIREMAN mode.

IN

*5.6.C. FIREMAN * 1 Units: [s/10] Time during the nugging signal is activated in case of:
RD
Freq.buzzer [1]d Default value: 5 Evacuation mode.

Enable Synth. [2]
Modes Emergency or Inspection with activation of
Freq.synth. [3]s
firemen's interrupt.
GA
Firemen's forwarding.
Complies EN81-72.
Y_
2 Default value: ALW Parameter to activate de voice synthesizer message in

NO, ONE, ALW case the control is in firemen service and:
Modes Emergency or Inspection with activation of
ON
firemen's interrupt.
Firemen's forwarding.
Possible values:
TH
[NO] No message is activated.

[ONE] The message is activated once. Complies EN81-72.
[ALW] The message is activated ever 'Freq.Synth.'
AN
seconds. Complies EN81-72.

3 Units: [s] See CT 5.6.C 'Enable Synth.'.
Default value: 4
5.6.D FUNC.EXTERN.MON.
Functions for extern monitoring.
Device Control

*5.6.D. FUNC.EXTERN* 1 Units: [s] Time that remains active signal indicating that the Car
Ret.Des.Pul.ALC[1]s Default value: 0 Alarm pushbutton has been activated (5.29 Ext S4).
12
T.Min.Puls.ALCA[2]s
2 Units: [s] Minimum time to be kept activated the alarm pushbutton
Default value: 2 to turn on Output parallel interface (Ext5.29-S4 and S4
Ext5.50).
12
5.6.E AHORRO ENERGIA
20
Energy saving controls for signage.
G_
*5.6.E. AHORRO ENER* 1 Default value: YES [YES] Lets turn off the LCD backlight cabin for energy
IN
Val.Cntrl.Backl.[1] NO, YES savings.
Val.Cntrl.Senal.[2]
2 Default value: NO [YES] Lets turn off the signal cabin and floor for savings
T.Cntrl.Senal.[3]m Energy.
FT
NO, YES
3 Units: [min] Time to switch off the lamp (energy saving in backlight,
Default value: 1 Indicators of ground and cabin).
5.7 LOAD
LI
AG
_T

*5.7. LOAD * 1 Default value: YES [YES]: Validates the car full load level CCC.

ER
Enable CC [1] NO, YES

Enable SC [2]
2 Default value: YES [YES]: Enables the car overload level (SC).
Enable Q0 [3] NO, YES
Enable Q1 [4]
IN
Enable Q2 [5] 3 Default value: NO [YES] Validate for Load Level 0.

Enable Q3 [6] NO, YES
Low.Lim.CC [7]
RD
[8] 4 Default value: NO [YES]: Validates car load level Q1 (10 %).
Enable LWS NO, YES
5 Default value: NO [YES]: Validates car load level Q2 (30 %).

GA
NO, YES
6 Default value: NO [YES]: Validates car load level Q3 (60 %).
NO, YES
Y_
7 Default value: 800 Lower limit for Full Load.

Full Load is considered when load is between 80% and
100% of nominal load or load exceeds 75 kg, when
ON
nominal load is equal or less than 300 kg.

8 Default value: NO Load is measured by Orona's load device.

TH
NO, ONE, ONE_R, [NO]: There is no load-device.

TWO [ONE]: There is one load-device.
[ONE_R]: There is one load-device: reduced board.
AN
[TWO]: There are two load-devices.
5.8 CALLS
Parameters related to special call configuration.
NOTE: After changing the setup of one or various pushbuttons, the controller must be switched
off and on for the change to be effective.

Device Control
5.8.1 LANDING CALLS (V)

Permits setting up the inputs of extensions 1 (floor ext.) (Vertical Bus).
Special menu for NON UNIVERSAL algorithm. Complete doc...
Make sure you have chosen the right traffic algorithm before to do any change.
12
12
*5.8.1. LANDING CAL* 1 Range: 0..63 Index of the selected Extension 1.
Ext1[1]BUS V P :2
20
E1[3]E2[4] 2 YES: Present node Shows if the Extension is present in the CAN bus..
Level[5] Entr[6]
NO: No present node
RE: Repeated node
G_
3 Land_UP: Landing call Type of call: (E_UP:0;E_DOWN:1;VIP:2) for input 1..
UP
Land_DN: Landing call
IN
DOWN
VIP: VIP call
4 Land_UP: Landing call Type of call: (E_UP:0;E_DOWN:1;VIP:2) for input 2..
FT
UP
Land_DN: Landing call
DOWN
5
VIP: VIP call
Range: 0..64
LI Floor of the pushbutton..
AG
6 ENT1, ENT2 Choose the entrance for this call..
_T
5.8.3 LANDING CALLS (V)

Permits setting up the inputs of extensions 1 (floor ext.) (Vertical Bus).
ER
Special menu for UNIVERSAL algorithm. Complete doc...

Make sure you have chosen the right traffic algorithm before to do any change.
IN

RD

*5.8.3. LANDING CAL* 1 Range: 0..63 Index of the selected Extension 1.
GA
Ext1[1] P :2
E1(3) E2[4] 2 YES: Present node Shows if the Extension is present in the CAN bus..
Level[5] Entr[6]
NO: No present node
Y_
RE: Repeated node

3 LEVEL Type of call: (E_UP:0;E_DOWN:1;VIP:2) for input 1..

ON
4 IR_LEVEL Type of call: (E_UP:0;E_DOWN:1;VIP:2) for input 2..

NOTHING
5 Range: 0..64 Floor of the pushbutton..
TH
6 ENT1, ENT2 Choose the entrance for this call..

AN
5.8.5 CABIN CALLS

Permits setting up the inputs of extensions 2 (car ext.) Complet3 doc...

Device Control

*5.8.5. CABIN CALLS* 1 Range: 0..15 Index of the selected Extension.
Ext2[1]J[2]Pr :3 The index is given by SW1
12
Level[4]Entr [5]
The weight of the switches is written on the PCB. The
COP [6]
numbers marked over the switch are not valid.
The weight of the 2EMB switch of the Ext. 2 is 32.
12
2 Range: 1..10 Number of the connector (J1, J2, ...) for the button.
3 YES: Present node Shows if the Extension is present in the CAN bus..

20
NO: No present node
RE: Repeated node
4 Number of floor called..
G_
5 ENT1, ENT2 Entrance number..
Range: 0..64 Control panel (if there are more than one)..
IN
6
B2, B1
5.8.6 CALL PROPERTIES
FT
Properties of the cabin calls.
LI
AG
*5.8.6. CALL PROPER* 1 Default value: 12 Maximum number of car calls that can be accepted
Max.Nr.Calls [1] simultaneously.
Erase calls [2] Default value: NO Enable the function that erases all the cabin's calls when
_T
Max.Nr.IR [3]
2 NO, YES the number of consecutive journeys without activation of
Erase calls Q [4] the photocells (IR1/2) is higher to parameter 'Max.Nr.IR'.
Max.Nr.Calls Q [5] In order to erase false cabins calls.
ER
3 Default value: 3 See parameter 'Erase Calls'

4 Default value: NO Enables the function that leads to erasing car calls when

IN
NO, YES the number of calls with an empty car level (no Q1, no
Q2, no Q3, no CCC) exceeds parameter Max.Nr.Calls Q.
The aim is to erase (suppress) car calls.
RD
5 Default value: 3 See 'Erase Calls Q'

5.9 MODES
GA
Parameters related to the operating modes of the controller.

5.9.1 NORMAL
Y_
Parameters related to the NORMAL mode.

ON

TH
*5.9.1. NORMAL * 1 Range: 0..63 Indicates the main floor's logic position
Main Floor Pos. [1] Default value: 0 Mind the position indicator.
Park w-Door[2]
Default value: CLOSED Determines the door condition when parking in normal
AN
CollecUniv Call [4] 2 OPEN, CLOSED, NULL service:

[OPE]: Door open
[CLO]: Door closed
[NUL]: No specific condition forced

Device Control

4 Default value: YES [YES]: 'UNIVERSAL' traffic controls (see Menu 5.2.1)
NO, YES permit registering more than one car call. Arrows at car
entrance returns and landings show the directional
trend.[NO]: 'UNIVERSAL traffic controls permit registering
12
only one car call.
5.9.2 FIREMEN'S
12
Parameters related to the FIREMAN mode.
20
G_
*5.9.2. FIREMEN'S * 1 Default value: NO [YES]: Enables the firemen's service. Is activated with
Enable Firemen's[1] NO, YES input IB (input E1 of extension 5.0).
Firemen's[2]
2 Default value: ENGLISH Indicates the type of operation of the firemen's
Firemen's Floor [3]
IN
ANUL_CAB service:(French - English - America - Anul_cab).
Logic_IB [4]
Enable IRM [5] FRENCH
Enable IAB [6] ENGLISH
FT
Car Cancel [7]
AMERICAN
Ena.AP.Redirect.[8]
Exit Fireme[9] OTHERS
Altern.Floor [10]
Closing CP Firem[11]
Aut.Opening PB [12]
3 Range: 0..63
Default value: 0
LI This is the logic position of the floor the lift is redirected to
in the firemen's service.

Entr2.Exclusive [13]
AG
Enable MRTemp [14] N_O, N_C
Delay UPS [15]s 5 Default value: YES [YES]: Mechanical door reopening (IRM1 and IRM2) is
NO, YES active during return of lift in a firemen's service.
_T
6 Default value: NO [YES]: Car calls can be made only if the switch enabling
NO, YES car calls in firemen's service 'IAB' is on.
ER
7 Default value: CLOSED Determines the door condition when parking in the
OPEN, CLOSED firemen's service Anul_cab:
[OPE]: Door open
IN
[CER]: Door closed

[CLO]: No specific condition forced
8 Default value: YES [YES]: The door open pushbutton is operative during lift
RD
NO, YES return in firemen's service. [NO]: The door open

pushbutton is not operative during lift return in firemen's
service.
GA
9 Default value: EN8172 [YES]: In the English type of firemen's control, the phase
NO with firemen in the car ends when the firemen's switch
remains off for more than 5 secs and is turned on again,
BRITISH with the car outside the firemen's return floor. [NO]: The
Y_
EN8172 firemen's service of the car does not end under the
aforesaid conditions.
10 Range: 0..63 In the type of American Firemen's control (Firemen's Type
ON
Default value: 0 [America])), the return floor will be as stated in this

parameter when the firemen's return landing is wrecked
(fire input of this floor ON).
TH
11 Default value: NO [YES]: In a firemen's service with a car of the English

NO, YES 'Firemen's Type', closing the door requires that the door
close pushbutton 'CP' is pressed together with the car
AN
pushbutton.
12 Default value: NO [YES]: In the phase with firemen in a car of the [English]
NO, YES 'Firemen's Type', the car door automatically opens on
reaching the 'Firemen's landing'.
13 Default value: NO Indicates that the cabin's access 2 is exclusive for
NO, YES fireman's operating mode.

Device Control

14 Default value: NO [NO] In firemen's mode, the control of temperature in the
NO, YES machine room is deactivated.
15 Units: [s] Delay for UPS activation in case of power supply failure

12
Default value: 120
5.9.3 EVACUATION
12
Parameters related to the EVACUATION mode.
20
G_
*5.9.3. EVACUATION * 1 Default value: NO [YES]: Enables the evacuation function. Is activated by
Enable evacuat. [1] NO, YES means of input IEV (input E3 of extension 5.0). In this
Evac.Floor [2] mode, only the following calls are active: car call from the
LogicEV [3] evacuation floor (Floor to leave), up landing calls to a floor
IN
below the evacuation floor, down landing calls to a floor
above the evacuation floor.
2 Range: 0..63 This is the logic position of the floor for evacuating the

FT
Default value: 0 building.

N_O, N_C
5.9.4 INSPECTION
LI
AG
Parameters related to the INSPECTION mode.
_T

*5.9.4. INSPECTION * 1 Default value: NO [YES]: Enables the limit switch option at the upper
ER
Insp.Limit.S [1] NO, YES terminal floor in the inspection control mode Prevents
Dist. FCSI [2]m overrunning the limit position):
Vmax Insp. [3] Positioning type 1: is the position of magnet CU.
IN
Positioning type 2: is parameter FCSI.

2 Units: [min] This is the position of movement limit with respect to the
levelling point at the upper terminal floor (only type 2).
RD
Default value: 500

3 Default value: VINSP Maximum inspection speed level.
VNULL:
GA
V00
V0
VINSP
Y_
V1
V2
ON
V3
VMAX
5.9.5 EMERGENCY
TH
Parameters related to the EMERGENCY mode.

5.9.B VIP
AN
Parameters related to the VIP mode.


Device Control

*5.9.B. VIP * 1 Default value: NO Enables the VIP calls function.
Enable VIP [1] NO, YES A VIP call results in an empty car coming to the floor the
Hands Free Vip [2] call has been made from
Hand Door [3]
The user is granted time 'T.Out of VIP' to activate switch
12
T.Out of VIP [4]s IAE or if parameter 'Hands_free_VIP' is set at [YES], to
Tmax wout Adj [5]s make a car call for a non-stop journey.
Park.Door [6]
2 Default value: YES [YES] The user need not activate switch IAE in order to be
12
T.Sal.FaseI-II[7]s
T.Bor.LlVIP. [8]m
NO, YES given priority over landing calls.
VIP Hospital [9] 3 Default value: NO Inoperative
Niv.Carga Q3 [10]
20
NO, YES
Niv.Carga Q2 [11]
Niv.Carga Q1 [12] 4 Units: [s] Time the VIP user has to turn switch IAE on or to press
Niv.Carga Q0 [13]
Default value: 20 the car call button (case of Hands free VIP). At the end of
G_
Error QO KG [14] this time, the system exits the VIP mode.
Anul.Lla.Cabina[15] 5 Units: [s] Time granted to the algorithm for assigning a VIP call to a
Enab.Car.Call.V[16]
Default value: 30 free car. If no assignment is made within this time, the
IN
Car.Call.VIP [17]d system activates the out-of-service status of all the cars of
the VIP group in order to accelerate the searching time.
6 Default value: OPEN Determines the door condition when parking in VIP mode:

FT
OPEN, CLOSED, NULL [OPE]: Door open
[CLO]: Door closed
LI
Default value: [OPE]
7 Units: [s] Time (in seconds) which causes the output of VIP Mode,
AG
Default value: 100 whatever the stage where you are.
8 Units: [min] Time (in minutes) after which it clears VIP calls that are
waiting to serve.
_T
Default value: 240

9 Default value: NO It validates the VIP calls for hospitals.
NO, YES The VIP calls produced a car reach the floor of the call at
ER
the earliest possible.

In principle, It is allocated free cabins. In case it had not,
it sends a busy car and telling users that they must leave
IN
the device.
10 Default value: YES [YES]Takes into account the load level between 60% and
NO, YES 80% of rated load to take into account the condition of
RD
empty cabin.
Only applicable to the weighing device Orona (Orona load
transmitter).
GA
Previously, the empty cabin condition took into account

only the levels of full load and overload.
60% of rated load to take into account the condition of
Y_
NO, YES
empty cabin.
transmitter).
ON

Default value: YES [YES]Takes into account the load level between 20% and
TH
12 NO, YES 40% of rated load to take into account the condition of
empty cabin.
AN
transmitter).

Device Control

NO, YES 20% of rated load to take into account the condition of
empty cabin, with a minimum charge indicated by 'Error
KG Q0'.
12
transmitter).
12
14 Range: 0..255 It establishes a minimum load (in kg) to differentiate
Default value: 20 between empty cabin and load level Q0.
20
15 Default value: NO
NO, YES
G_
NO, YES
17 Units: [s/10]

IN
Default value: 40
5.9.C AUTODIAL. TEST
FT
Parameters related to the 'Autodialler redirect' mode.
LI
Description
AG
*5.9.C. AUTODIAL. T* 1 Default value: NO Enable to make the voice's test (monthly) of the
Enable test [1] NO, YES autodialler.
End Level [2]
2 Default value: 17 Floor to redirect the car when voice test of the autodialler

_T
T.output test [3]m

is started.
Default value: [17] or floor where control machine is
sitted.
ER
3 Units: [min] Maximum time to make the voice's test. The test is
Default value: 5 finished when the time is over or if 'Act. Voice Test' [NO]
(CT 4.3.9.1).
IN
Parameters related to the 'Autodialler redirect' mode.

RD
5.9.D FIRE
Parameters related to fire mode.
GA

Y_

*5.9.D. FIRE * 1 Default value: NO Activates the control of the fire mode (EN81-73).
Enable Fire [1]
ON
NO, YES
Int.Fire.Gen [2]
2 Default value: EXT5 Indicates where is made the reading of the input of the
Int.Fire.Alter[3] N0, EXT5 general fire switch.
Int.Bypass Fir[4]
TH
End Level.GFloor[5] [NO]: There is not input reading of the general fire switch.
Altern.End Level[6] It is considered always inactive.
Park w/door [7] [EXT5]: The general fire switch if connected to the
AN
Logic IIG [8] Extension 5.1 (E1)

Logic IIPEP [9] o IG: General fire switch. Manual or
Logic IBYPI [10] automatic. Normally close.

Device Control

Ena. Fire ComH [11] 3 Default value: EXT5 Indicates where is made the reading of the input of the
N0, EXT5 alternative fire switch (situated in main floor).
[NO]: There is not input reading of the alternative fire
switch. It is considered always inactive.
12
[EXT5]: The alternative fire switch if connected to the
Extension 5.1 (E2)
o IIPEP: Fire switch in the main floor. Automatic.
12
Normally close.
4 Default value: EXT5 Indicates where is made the reading of the input of the
N0, EXT5 bypass fire switch.
20
[NO]: There is not input reading of this switch. It is
considered always inactive.
[EXT5]: The bypass fire switch if connected to the
G_
Extension 5.1 (E3)
o BYPASSI: Bypass fire switch (american fireman).
Range: 0..64 Fire main floor. Is the floor the lift goes to in case of
IN
5 Default value: 0 activation of the general fire switch.
6 Range: 0..64 Fire alternative floor. Is the floor the lift goes to in case of

FT
Default value: 0 activation of the alternative general fire switch.
7 Default value: OPEN Type of parking in fire mode.

OPEN, CLOSED, NULL
8 Default value: N_C
N_O, N_C
LI
EXT 5:. Input E1.
AG
9 Default value: N_C EXT 5:. Input E2.
N_O, N_C

_T
N_O, N_C
11 Default value: NO Activates the fire mode to all the controllers of the same
NO, YES group. Actually not in use.
ER
Parameters related to fire mode.

IN
5.A MODES FUNCT.

RD
Parameters related to special functions within the operating modes.
5.A.1 FIRE
GA

Y_

ON
*5.A.1. FIRE * 1 Default value: NO Validates the zone cancellation functions in case of a fire.
Enable Smoke_SW [1] NO, YES
Smoke_SW_Fireman[2]
TH
2 Default value: NO [YES]: The fire cancellation function is active in fireman's

LogicAPI [3] NO, YES service.
Ena.AP.Smoke [4]

AN
N_O, N_C
4 Default value: NO [YES] button It allows car doors opening pushbutton is
NO, YES active, having detected a fire in the plant.

Device Control
5.A.2 ZONE CANCEL

These parameters affect the zone cancellation functions.
16 zones (zone 0 to 15).
Activation of the function:
12
From a monitor.
Always.
12
From extensions 5.37 to 5.39 (an input for each zone) sitted at the machine's room.
Deactivation of the function:
20
Because of different modes (firemen, evacuation).
From extensions 5.59 to 5.61 (an input for each zone) sitted at the cabin's roof (access
keys).
G_
Deactivation of the cabin's calls annulation without deactivation of the function:
Because of inputs IN/IM.
IN
Because of modes: door's blocking or car's priority mode with parameter 'Val.AZ Pri_Cab'
FALSE.
See result of the annulation function in menu 3.D.1.
FT

5.A.2.2 PART ZC
Parameters for each zone. LI
AG
_T
*5.A.2.2. PART ZC * 1 Range: 0..15 Zone's cancellation function's zone's index. There are 16
Zone[1] zones. Index must be between 0 and 15.
Enable Zone [2] Default value: NO [YES] Enable of the zone cancellation function, particular
2
[3]
ER
Ena ZC Ext5 for each zone. In order to be active, the general enable
NO, YES
Deact ZC Ext2 [4] 'Enable ZC' (CT 5.A.2.1) must be [YES].
Desct ZC Ext5 [5]
3 Default value: NO [YES] Permission for activation of zone's cancellation
VIP Calls Zone [6]
IN
NO, YES function through extensions 5 (ext5.37, 5.38, 5.39) sitted

Car Calls Zone [7] in the machine's room.
Ext.Calls Zone [8]
Pass.Zone [9] [NO] The annulation function is always active.
RD
The annulations function can be activated too through a

monitor.
4 Default value: IN [NO/IN/IM] Validate for deactivation (or non activation) of
cabin's annulation cabin (the annulation function is not
GA
NO, IN, IM
deactivated, only the cabin's) with cabin's keys through
extensions 2 (ext2.7, 2.15). Each zone is deactivated with
a key. Each key may deactivate more than one zone.
Y_
Extensions 2 have 2 inputs (ext2.7, for access 1; ext2.15,

for access 2) to deactivate the annulation function:
IN11/IN12, IM1/IM2. The last one is also for defaulters.
ON
5 Default value: NO [YES] Permission of deactivation (or no activation) of

NO, YES zone's cancelation function with access cards through
extensions 5 (ext5.59, 5.60, 5.61) sitted in cabin's roof.
There is one input for each zone.
TH
6 Default value: NO [YES] Despite the annulation function is activated, VIP

YES, NO calls are permitted.
Default value: [NO]..
AN
7 Default value: NO [YES] Despite the annulation function is activated, cabin

YES, NO, PASS calls are permitted.
8 Default value: NO [YES] Despite the annulation function is activated, floor
YES, NO calls are permitted.

Device Control

9 Default value: 0 Password the user must introduce in order to access the
zone indicated by the zone's index. Password's digits are
introduced by the car's calls buttons.
12
Parameters for each zone.
12
5.A.2.3 ACCESS ZC
Access table for each zone.
20
G_
*5.A.2.3. ACCESS ZC* 1 Range: 0..15 Zone's cancellation function's zone's index. There are 16
Zone[1] zones. Index must be between 0 and 15.
IN
Acc1 Acc2 Default value: OFF Zones with access 1 enabled.
P0) [2] [3]
2 OFF, ON Default value: [NO]..
P1) [] []
FT
P2) [] [] 3 Default value: OFF Zones with access 2 enabled.
...
OFF, ON Default value: [NO]..
P63) [] []
LI
Access table for each zone.
AG
5.A.3 FORCED LANDING STOP

_T
Parameters for Forced Landing Stop function.

ER

*5.A.3. FORCED LAND* 1 Default value: NO Enables the function to stop mandatorily the level 'Park
IN
Ena.Forced stop[1] NO, ALW, UP, DN level'.

End level [2] [NO]: Function not activated.
[ALW]: Park obligatory in up and down direction.
RD
[UP]: Park obligatory just in travels in up direction.

[DN]: Park obligatory just in travels in down direction.
GA
2 Range: 0..63 Floor to stop obligatory in the travels of the lift.

Default value: 0
Y_
Parameters for Forced Landing Stop function.

ON
5.A.4 HOMELANDING
TH

AN

*5.A.4. HOMELANDING* 1 Default value: NO Enables de function to send empty cars to a destination
Enable function [1] NO, YES level after selected time.
End Level [2]
2 Range: 0..63 Indicates the logic position of the floor the lift is redirected
T.of resend [3]s Default value: 0 to by the park function.

Device Control

Start. Level[4][5] 3 Units: [s] Time for a free car to be sent.
Default value: 7
4 Range: 0..63 Selects a floor to visualize the forwarding floor.. Choose
12
the starting level to show.
5 Default value: NO YES: shows that a car has been sent from the selected
NO, YES level.
12
5.A.5 CANC.CAR CALL
20
G_
*5.A.5. CANC.CAR CA* 1 Default value: NO Car floor calls are deactivated if inputs of extensions 5.22
IN
Canc.Car call [1] NO, YES a 5.27 are activated (floors 0 to 35).
Logic_API [2]

FT
N_O, N_C
5.A.6 SPECIAL AUTO. TRAF. LI

Special automatic traffic (S.A.T.)
AG
5.A.6.1 CONFIG. S.A.T.
Configuration Parameters of Special Automatic Traffic.
_T

ER

IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

Device Control

*5.A.6.1. CONFIG. S* 1 Default value: NO Enable the function of Special Automatic Traffic (S.A.T.).
Enable S.A.T. [1] NO, MF, AUTO This type of function in only possible in Normal mode or
Enable InputExt2[2] Generator Mode. During the S.A.T. is not possible to
Enable InputExt5[3] register the landing and car calls. Also, some devices (load
12
Stop F[4]U[5]D[6] device, photocell or barrier, re-levelling system... can be
Stop level in MF[7] disconnected.
T.Do.Op.MF [8]d [NO]: S.A.T. NOT permitted.
12
T.Do.Op.RestF[9]d
[MF]: It is permitted S.A.T. the type Main Floor (MF).
T. End Cycle [10]s
T. warning CP [11]d The activation is produced when the inputs Ext2.7-E8
and/or Ext5.32-E1 have been activated (previously
20
enabled).
After it activation, the calls registered are cancelled, the
lift goes to the Main Floor of the Special Traffic and it rest
G_
parked as the park mode programmed for this type of
traffic.
After it cancellation (cancellation of the input or of the
IN
parameter), the lift inform with one buzzer intermittent
the end of the type of traffic and it rest parked as the type
of park in Normal mode.
[AUTO]: Permit the activation of S.A.T. of Automatic
FT
Traffic type (AUTO).
The activation is produced when the inputs Ext2.7-E8
and/or Ext5.32-E1 have been activated (previously
LI
enabled).
o If it is enabled only one of them, the activation is
produced when the corresponding input is activated.
AG
o If both are enabled, the activation is produced when
both inputs are activated.
The cancellation is produced:
_T
o If only one of the inputs is enabled, the cancellation of

the input suppose the end of Traffic.
o If both inputs are enabled, the cancellation of one
ER
input suppose the change to MF traffic. The

cancellation of both inputs suppose the end of S.A.T.
2 Default value: NO Enable of the input Ext2.7-E8 for the S.A.T.
IN
NO, YES
3 Default value: NO Enable of the input Ext5.32-E1 for the S.A.T.

RD
NO, YES
4 Selects a floor to visualize the forwarding floor.
5 Default value: YES Permit the programming of the sequence of stops in Up

GA
NO, YES and in Down direction in each floor.
6 Default value: YES Permit the programming of the sequence of stops in Up

Y_
NO, YES and in Down direction in each floor.
7 Range: 0..63 Indicate the logic position of the Main Floor of S.A.T.
Default value: 0
ON
8 Units: [s/10] Is the time of door opened concerned a one stop in the
Default value: 80 Main Floor of S.A.T. (tenth).
TH
9 Units: [s/10] Is the time of door opened concerned a one stop different
Default value: 20 of the Main floor of S.A.T. (tenth).
10 Units: [s] Is the time to indicate the End of S.A.T. (seconds). After

AN
Default value: 30 this time (in the Main Floor with the doors opened), the
lift come to the Normal functioning.
11 Units: [s/10] Permit the configuration in advance warning to user when
Default value: 1 initiate the door closing (tenth).

Device Control
5.A.6.2 CONTROLS S.A.T.

Parameters for cancel the controls of the controller in the Special Automatic Traffic.
12
*5.A.6.2. CONTROLS * 1 Default value: OPEN Indicate the type of door park during the S.A.T.

12
Door Parked [1] OPEN, CLOSED, NULL [OPE]: Opened.
Act.Buz.Warni.CP[2]
[CLO]: Closed.
Frec.Buzzer CP[3]d
Enable IR. [4] [NUL]: Null
20
Enable PQ. [5] 2 Default value: YES [YES] Permit the warning of door closed by buzzers
Enable ISON. [6] NO, YES (beeps) interrupted.
Enable PA. [7]
Units: [s/10] Permit the configuration the frequency of the beeps of
G_
Enable FAN [8] 3 Default value: 5 door closing warning (tenths). It does Not work for LCD
Ena.Per.Arrow [9]
indicator.
4 Default value: NO [NO] Permit the disconnection of the photocell or barrier
IN
NO, YES during S.A.T.
5 Default value: NO [NO] Permit the disconnection of load device during the
S.A.T.
FT
NO, YES
6 Default value: NO [NO] Permit the disconnection of re-levelling during S.A.T.
NO, YES
7 Default value: YES
NO, YES
LI
The configuration the functioning of AP (open door)
pushbutton during S.A.T.
[YES] The AP pushbutton is activated.
AG
[NO] The AP pushbutton is cancelled.
8 Default value: NO Program the working of Fan during S.A.T.

_T
NO, YES [NO] The Fan maintain the preliminary state to the
activation of S.A.T. In case of the options: Switch or
pushbutton for Fan, the inputs are not activated. If it was
activated, stay activated. If it was cancelled, stay
ER
cancelled.
[YES] The Fan continues working like in Normal Mode.
9 Default value: YES This parameter concerns to the landing arrows and only is
IN
NO, YES activated in S.A.T. The landing arrows always show the
directional state (next direction), not confuse with the
direction of running.
RD
[NO]: The lift work as the parameter CT 5.6.3

'Ena.Per.Arrow'
[YES]: All the landing arrows indicate permanently the
GA
state of direction of the lift. It is independent of algorithm

type. It help to know if the lift is in AUTO or MF mode in
S.A.T.. If there is a landing gong it is necessary to select
[NO].
Y_
5.B GENERATOR
ON
Parameters related to the operating mode with generator set.

TH
5.B.1 PARAM.GEN.
Parameters related to the generator power and the power consumed by the cars.
AN

*5.B.1. PARAM.GEN. * 1 Default value: NO [YES]: Validates the generator function..
Enable GEN [1] NO, YES

Device Control

Ident_Group_G [2] 2 Range: 0..5 Indicates the number of the generator this lift is
Ident_Cab_G [3] Default value: 0 connected to. .
Num. Cab. Gen. [4]
3 Range: 0..5 Identifier of a car within a group of cars connected to the
Type Canc[5]
12
Default value: 0 same generator..
Resting floor [6]
Park w/door [7] 4 Range: 0..6 Not used.
N_Cab in use [8] Default value: 0
12
5 Default value: DEFINED Selects the home landing in the generator mode.
ANY [DEFINED]:The lift is sent back to the floor programmed
in parameter RESTING FLOOR. [ANY]: No homing takes
20
DEFINED place.
6 Default value: 0 This is the logic position of the floor the lift is redirected to
in the generator shutdown mode
G_
7 Default value: OPEN Type of parking when car is cancelled according to
OPEN, CLOSED, NULL explanations in Generator Shutdown Mode.
[OPE]: Door open
IN
[CLO]: Door closed
8 Range: 0..6 If the number of operational cars in normal or evacuation
FT
Default value: 2 mode exceeds this parameter while operating with the
generator in operation, the cars with the lower index
IDENT_CAB_G are put out of service (the generator
LI shutdown mode is activated)..
AG
Parameters related to the generator power and the power consumed by the cars.
5.B.2 KVA GEN.

_T
Parameters related to the functioning mode with generator group.

ER

IN
*5.B.2. KVA GEN. * 1 Default value: 31 The power the generator can provide..
kVA generator [1]
kVA running [2] 2 Default value: 20 This is the motor input power when it is working..

RD
Parameters related to the operating mode with generator set.

GA
5.B.3 PRI.GEN.
Y_
Parameters related to the functioning mode when the generator is activated.

ON

TH
*5.B.3. PRI.GEN. * 1 Default value: NO Not used.

Canc_Door_Block [1] NO, YES
Canc_No_Urgent [2]
2 Default value: NO Not used.

AN
Canc_Pri_Car [3]
NO, YES
3 Default value: NO Not used.
NO, YES
Parameters related to the functioning mode when the generator is activated.

Device Control
5.B.4 START TIME GEN

Parameters related to the starting times of the cabins of the generator group.
12
*5.B.4. START TIME * 1 Units: [s] Not used.

12
Start time [1]s Default value: 0
20
Parameters related to the starting times of the cabins of the generator group.
5.C PIC
G_
Parameters related to auxiliary microcontroller that measures phase out and speed. Reserved
to authorized personnel.
IN
5.C.1 PHASE OUT
Parameters related to the control of 3-phase signal.
FT
*5.C.1. PHASE OUT *

No.
1
Mark Possible Values
F60, F50
LI
Description
Mains frequence 50/60 Hz.
Frequency [1]
AG
Default value: [50]..
5.D AUTODIALLER FILTER

_T
Parameters for control of filtering of telealarm calls.

ER

*5.D. AUTODIALLER F* 1 Default value: YES Enable of the autodialler's filter.
IN
Enable FTA [1] NO, YES Despite value of this parameter, the autodialler's filter is
T. discon. FTA[2]d inactive if:
Fireman's, inspection or emergency operating modes.
RD
Without position reference or exploration data.

If 'Enable FTA' is TRUE, the autodialler is filtered in the
GA
following situations:
Car is moving.
Car is stopped at door's zone with door opened (door
Y_
correspondent to access) and with no door's panes.

If filtering conditions disappear, there is a 'T.discon.FTA'
time until disabling of filtering.
ON
2 Units: [s/10] Time for disabling the autodiallers filter.

Default value: 50 See parameter 'Enable FTA'.
TH
Parameters for control of filtering of telealarm calls.

AN
7 ASSEMBLY
Parameters for starting the control during erection.

Device Control

*7. ASSEMBLY * 1 Default value: YES [YES]: Activates a special emergency mode that is used
Assembly mode [1] NO, YES during the initial assembly. Its value must be set to [NO]
upon completion of the lift assembly.
12
Limits Vmax [2]
Vmax_insp [3] Default value: V_GV2 [VMAX]: Limits the maximum speed level in the following
2
0ing_Sp [4] journeys: floor-to-floor, recovery, zeroing, and lift well
Vinsp, V_GV1, V_GV2,
W.Expl_Sp [5] exploration
12
V_GV3, V_GMAX
Ena.Ir.Insp/Emer[6]
Magnets CB in CO[7] 3 Default value: Vinsp Maximum inspection speed level.
Magnets CS in CU[8]
Vinsp, V0, VMAX
20
Enable Inp.Ext5 [9] Vinsp, V1, V2, V3, Permits selecting Vinsp, V1, V2, V3 or VMAX as the speed
4
Encoder Rot. [10] VMAX for the zeroing process. Only for variable drives with
Deact.TI/TS [11] position system type 2. Make sure the selected speed is
G_
V00 [12] activated (see 5.3.2).
IsonV0 [13] Vinsp, V1, V2, V3, Permits selecting Vinsp, V1, V2, V3 or VMAX as the speed
BR Control [14] 5
VMAX for lift well exploration. Only for variable drives with
Door Blocked [15] position system type 2. Make sure the selected speed is
IN
activated (see 5.3.2).
6 Default value: NO Setting [NO] cancels the detection of the door reopening
signals.(IR: photocell and IRM: mechanical reopening,
FT
NO, YES
during the inspection or Emergency services. Permits car
travels with no door operator installed.
7 Range: 1..10 This must state the number of magnets CB (Type II) /
Default value: 1 LI CSB (Type III) there are below the lower magnet (zone
CO). This number must coincide with the value detected
AG
8 Range: 1..10 This must state the number of magnets CS (Type II) /
Default value: 2 CSB (Type III) there are above the upper magnet (zone
CU). This number must coincide with the value detected
_T
9 Default value: NO Enables all the 'Enable' correspondent to the following

NO, YES modes/functions/controls:
ER
Enable firemen's (5.9.2)

Enable evacuation (5.9.3)
Enable water in pit (5.9.8)
IN
Enable urgent cancel (5.9.9)

Enable no urgent cancel (5.9.A)
Enable smoke control (5.3.4.C)
RD
Enable rescue (5.3.4.4)

Enable cancel if fire (5.A.1)
GA
If 'Enable Inp Ext5' parameter is FALSE, all those 'Enable'

are deactivated.
If TRUE, all 'Enable' TRUE are activated.
Y_
Default value: [NO]. It must be [YES] after assembly and

final set-up are finished.
ON
10 Default value: Dir1 With this parameter, the control can be adapted to the
Dir0, Dir1 two types of pulse phase shifts of the over speed
governor encoder (A,B).
TH
11 NO, YES The machine room's temperature control is temporally

deactivated (during 300 cycles).

AN
13 NO, YES [YES]: It allows the normal isolevelling movements (at

speed V0) of the type III positioning system.

Device Control

14 Default value: NO Validate the brake control. It is controlled the state of the
NO, C_1, C_2, C_3, arms of the brake in rest and on way.
C_4 [NO]: There is not brake control.
[C_1]: The arms of the control are only controlled by the
12
entrance E9 (PBCM). Serial or parallel reading of the arms
of the brake.
[C_2]: Brake with two arms. Individual reading of the
12
brake arms. Entrances E9 and E6 of PBCM.
[C_3]: Brake with three arms. Individual reading of the
brake arms. Entrances E9, E6 and E7 of PBCM.
20
[C_4]: Brake with four arms. Individual reading of the
brake arms. Entrances E9, E6, E7 and E8 of PBCM.
15 NO, YES This command enables the door lock mode (provided no
G_
other top priority mode is active).
IN
FT
Parameters for starting the control during erection. LI

AG
6.2. Description of the faults of the device Control
Description of the faults of the device Control

_T
No. Name Description Reason

1 FA_NO_P32_RUNNING With the car running, the security chain was Check the safety contacts upstream of point
ER
interrupted before point 32. 32 (safety travel LS, over speed governor
In the inspection and emergency modes, this safety gear, tension pulley, contacts,
fault is not detected. buffers, etc). The over speed governor
pulley can cause intermittent faults.
IN
As for electric drives, if parameter 'Mem.P32

running' (5.3.4) is enabled, the Fault is of the
stored type.
RD
2 FA_NO_P32_REST With the car at rest, the security chain remained Check the safety contacts upstream of point
interrupted for time (see CT. 5.3.3 Delay P32). 32 (safety travel LS, over speed governor
In the inspection mode, this fault is detected safety gear, tension pulley, contacts,
only when pressing the start pushbuttons buffers, etc). The over speed governor
GA
BSM/BDM. pulley can cause intermittent faults.

In the emergency mode, this fault is detected
only when pressing the start pushbuttons
Y_
BSCM/BDCM.
3 FA_NO_P35_RUNNING With the car running, the security chain was Check the door detection contacts 'CP' (case
interrupted between points 32 and 35. of manual landing doors).
ON
4 FA_NO_P35_REST With the car at rest, the security chain remained Check the door detection contacts 'CP' (case
interrupted for time (see CT.5.3.3 Delay P35) of manual landing doors).
between points 32 and 35. The information of the position that provides
TH
the fault details helps to identify the

problematic door.
Normally, this fault occurs when the user
AN
keeps the landing door open too long.

Device Control

5 FA_DOOR_LOCK Point 36 of the security chain is not activated Check the landing doors and the lock
after a delay from the beginning of the closing contacts, especially on the floors where the
of the doors. fault is registered
Check the car door and its door closing
12
contact.
Check the door operator. The information of
the position that provides the fault details
12
helps to identify the problematic door
6 FA_UPPER_LIMIT_SW_HYD In a hydraulically driven lift, the upper terminal Analyse why the lift overran the upper travel
RAULIC floor limit switch actuated(input E9). limit switch(excessive deceleration distance,
20
When the safety chain closes, the car is cold oil...). If nothing wrong is found,
redirected to the lower terminal floor. All types increase the speed change distance for the
of calls for this lift are cancelled. last floor
G_
This fault is locked (to restore it, enable the CT's
function 1.5 FAULT RECOV)
7 FA_WATCHDOG System fault.
IN
This occurs when a software task is not
refreshed.
It results in a reset of the CPU.
FT
8 FA_NO_TEL_LINE The alarm dialler (Autodialler2005) has There is not phone line.
communicate that the telephone line is not
available.
100 FA_NO_P36_RUNNING
interrupted between points 35 and 36.
LI
With the car running, the security chain was During a journey, check the space between
the landing door driving device and the locks
(CT)
AG
especially at the floor where the fault was
registered (fault data CT.
This fault can also be due to the breaking of
_T
the closed car door contacts CC1, CC2.

200 FA_IR1/IRM1_CLOSING The maximum number of consecutive door Check for correct functioning of door
reopening at entrance nr.1 under the action of reopening at entrance nr.1 (obstruction,
ER
IR1 or IRM1 has been exceeded(see CT 5.5.3 door condition, alignment of photocell,
Num.Max.Reopen). barrier, etc.)
The car calls are suppressed, the car is parked Fault caused by the user.
with door open and out of service for landing
IN
calls .
Car calls can still be registered.
The fault is restored when the door finishes
RD
closing.
Out of service status also reverses at the end of
time 'Recov.IR.Lock' (5.5.4)
GA
201 FA_IR2/IRM2_CLOSING The maximum number of consecutive door Check for correct functioning of door
reopening at entrance nr.2 under the action of reopening at entrance nr.2 (obstruction,
IR2 or IRM2 (see CT 5.5.3 Num.Max.Reopen). door condition, alignment of photocell,
Y_
Performance similar to fault 200. barrier, etc.)

Fault caused by the user.
202 FA_IR1_PERMANENT Photocell or barrier-induced door reopening at Check for correct functioning of photoelectric
ON
entrance nr.1 (IR1) remained interrupted for door reopening at entrance nr1 (alignment
time (see CT 5.5.2 PER_IR_Detect) of photocell, barrier, etc.)
Fault caused by the user
TH
203 FA_IR2_PERMANENT Photocell or barrier-induced door reopening at Check for correct functioning of photoelectric
entrance nr.2 (IR2) remained interrupted for door reopening at entrance nr2 (alignment
time (see HC 5.5.2 PER_IR_Detect) of photocell, barrier, etc.)
AN
Fault caused by the user

204 FA_LCP1_ON System detected that the door closing limit Check the door automatism and the door
switch at entrance nr.1, is permanently on. closed contacts LCP
This fault can be detected only if parameter
5.5.7 LCP Entr1 is enabled.

Device Control

205 FA_LCP2_ON System detected that the door closing limit Check the door automatism and the door
switch at entrance nr.2, is permanently on. closed contacts LCP
This fault can be detected only if parameter
5.5.7 LCP Entr2 is enabled.
12
208 FA_IRM1_PERMANENT The mechanical door reopening at entrance nr.1 Check for correct functioning of the
(IRM1) remained interrupted for time (see CT mechanical reopening of the door.
5.5.2 Detect_IR_PER). Fault caused by the user.
12
209 FA_IRM2_PERMANENTE The mechanical door reopening at entrance nr.2 Check for correct functioning of the
(IRM2) remained interrupted for time (see CT mechanical reopening of the door.
5.5.2 Detect_IR_PER).
20
Fault caused by the user.
210 FA_AP1_PERMANENT The door open pushbutton AP1 remained on for Check the pushbutton.
more than 30 sec. Fault caused by the user.
G_
211 FA_AP2_PERMANENT The door open pushbutton AP2 remained on for Check the pushbutton.
more than 30 sec. Fault caused by the user.
290 FA_OUT_DZ The car stays outside the door zone for a certain Check for associated faults which have led to
IN
time (see CT 5.3.3 Outside DZ). this situation.
Fault not detected in the inspection and
emergency modes.
FT
291 FA_OUT_DZ_RESCUE During redirection to floor with the rescue Movement performed at excessive speed.
system in an electric installation, the car stops CT's parameter Ret:punto Par of 5.3.3 is set
outside the door zone. Prevents consecutive too high.
rescues. LI
To be able to carry out a new rescue operation,
enable CT's function 1.5 FAULT RECOV
AG
292 FA_OUT_DZ_MOV_DO It has been detected during an open door Movement performed at excessive speed.
movement that the car has left the door zone.
307 FA_M/C_ROOM_LOW_TEMP The machine-room temperature is below the Careful with extreme ambient conditions.
_T
minimum temperature value programmed as a

parameter. This prevents only floor-to-floor
journeys to start.
ER
This fault is detected only if the control has the

option (see CT 5.3.4.5).
308 FA_PRESSSURE_SW_HYDR Not implemented.
IN
309 FA_ALARM_INVERTER A fault of the speed regulator has been detected Analyse the causes which produced this
(input E5 on). fault, by retrieving information of the speed
This fault is detected only if the drive is the regulator.
RD
variable type.
310 FA_UP_ROLLBACK System detected a reverse motion during the Check connections of over speed governor
start cycle in the up direction. To restore the encoder. (Cable A or cable /A can be
fault, enable the CT's function 1.5 FAULT RECOV interchanged with cable B or cable /IB
GA
or press the inspection switch. respectively.)

Problems with the vertical drive, power
supply to motor, etc.
Y_
311 FA_DOWN_ROLLBACK System detected a reverse motion during the Check connections of over speed governor
start cycle in the down direction. To restore the encoder. (Cable A or cable /A can be
fault, enable the CT's function 1.5 FAULT RECOV interchanged with cable B or cable /IB
ON
or press the inspection switch. respectively.)

Problems with the vertical drive, power
supply to motor, etc.
TH
312 FA_RELAY_RPS_STUCK Relay RPS of auxiliary circuit for open door Check relay RPS (board PPS) and input PS
movements is on permanently (input PS on).This (Master Board).
fault is detected only if the control includes the
AN
're-levelling w/ open door' option (see CT 5.5.3.1

'Relevel DO') or the 'levelling w/ open door'
option (see CT 5.5.3.1 'Levelling DO').
To restore the fault, enable the CT's function 1.5
FAULT RECOV or press the inspection switch.

Device Control

313 FA_IR1_RUNNING It occurs when the photocell at entrance nr.1 Analyse the causes of its activation, user's
(IR1) has been operated during a journey of the action
car. It is used only in doorless car installations.
This is a stored type fault. It can also be
12
restored by making a car call
314 FA_IR2_RUNNING It occurs when the photocell at entrance nr.2 Analyse the causes of its activation, user's
(IR2) has been operated during a journey of the action
12
car. It is used only in doorless car installations.
This is a stored type fault. It can also be
restored by making a car call
20
315 FA_RESCUE_DOES_NOT_RE This failure occurs when the control of an Check connection to the auxiliary rescue
ACT electric lift orders redirection to nearest floor in system. Check that relay R1 in rescue
rescue mode (output ActRe on) and fails to get switchboard turns on.
confirmation of the activation of input ConRe
G_
within 30 sector be able to carry out a new
rescue operation, enable CT's function 1.5
FAULT RECOV
IN
319 FA_RPS_OFF This fault occurs when relay RPS does not turn Auxiliary circuit of the open door movements
on when activated (input PS remains off). PPS.
This fault is detected only if the control includes Wrong parameters.
FT
the 're-levelling w/ open door' option (see CT Faulty connections.
5.5.3.1 'Relevel DO').
To restore the fault, enable the CT's function 1.5
FAULT RECOV or press the inspection switch.
326 FA_CHANGE_ROPE
LI
On M33/M34 lifts, the number of journeys
exceeds the sum of values LIM_ROPE_AN +
INC_ROPE_FA (see 5.3.4.8 and 3.1)
AG
327 FA_ODD_PARITY_AON_BOF This fault occurs when the status of inputs EA,
F EB on the master board (PBCM) is EA ON, EB
OFF.
_T
These inputs refer to the condition of the relays

A and B on board PPS (open door movements).
An imparity has taken place.
ER
328 FA_ODD_PARITY_AOF_BON This fault occurs when the status of inputs EA,
EB on the master board (PBCM) is EA OFF, EB
ON.
IN
These inputs refer to the condition of the relays

A and B on board PPS (open door movements).
An imparity has taken place.
RD
329 FA_M/C_ROOM_OVERTEMP The machine room temperature exceeded the Careful with extreme ambient conditions.
maximum temperature value programmed as a
parameter. This prevents only floor-to-floor
GA
journeys to start.
This fault is detected only if the control has the
option (see CT 5.3.4.5).
Y_
330 FA_CONTAC_STUCK This alarm occurs when the contactor input is on Stuck contactor or bad connection.
while the associated contactor coil is off.
The field [COMILLAS]Xtra Info[COMILLAS] of
ON
the fault shows the contactor input concerned.

See electromechanical drawing.
340 FA_NO_CONTACTOR This alarm occurs when the contactor input is off A contactor remains off.
TH
while the associated contactor coil is on.

The field [COMILLAS]Xtra Info[COMILLAS] of
the fault shows the contactor input concerned.
AN
See electromechanical drawing.

Device Control

345 FA_BRAKING_ONWAY Brake braking on way. One of the arms has not Microswitch of the arm bad regulated or
opened at the beginning of the way after a damaged.
T.Ret.FR time (CT 5.3.4.3) or it has fallen during Incorrect connexion to the coil of the brake.
the way a time longer then T.FR. (CT 5.3.4.3).
Coil of the brake damaged.
12
It is detected if BR Control is different from
[NO] (CT 5.3.4.3, CT 7): There is not connection of E9, E6, E7 or E8
to the PBCM.
[C_1]: It is proven by E9 of PBCM.
12
Etc.
[C_2]: They are proven by E9 and E6 of PBCM.
[C_3]: They are proven by E9, E6 and E7 of
PBCM.
20
[C_4]: They are proven by E9, E6, E7 and E8 of
PBCM.
346 FA_NOTBRAKING_STILL It is detected if any of the arms of the brake Brake not braking. One of the arms has
G_
does not brake in rest. been open.
It is detected if BR Control is different from [NO] Microswitch of the arm bad regulated or
(CT 5.3.4.3, CT 7): damaged.
IN
[C_1]: It is proven by E9 of PBCM. Etc.
[C_2]: They are proven by E9 and E6 of PBCM.
[C_3]: They are proven by E9, E6 and E7 of
FT
PBCM.
[C_4]: They are proven by E9, E6, E7 and E8 of
PBCM.
347 AV_CORTE_SERIE
LI
Detects if serial cut offs are being produced.
Detection for this control is faster than points
Slide shoe sticks against interlock.
Loosening of cables.
P32, P35, P36 on PBCM.
AG
Auxiliary rescue contacts.
Without this control, a serial cut off can produce Etc.
the following faults:
_T
In a closed loop controlled drive the car can

crash into the extremes (speed overshooting).
Brake fault braking during running (Fault. 345).
ER
Sliding fault (Fault. 804).

For detection, either existing vertical drive
contacts are read, or an auxiliary relay
connected to point P36.
IN
This control is activated if 'Ctrl.Corte Serie' is

distinct from [NO] (CT 5.3.4.3) and 'COCU
Reading' is different from [MB] (CT 5.4.1):
RD
[NO]: Checked by PBCM E9.

[DRV]: Vertical drive contactors are checked.
GA
[PBCM]: Checks contact for auxiliary relay at

point P36 on PBCM. Read via CU input on main
board (PBCM J22-3), as log as reading of CO-CU
takes place via Extension 4.
Y_
348 FA_CEM1_STUCK This alarm occurs when the input of contactor Stuck contactor or bad connection.
CEM1 is on while the contactor coil is off.
349 FA_SMOKE_SHAFT Annexe for Belgium. (5.3.4.B Smoke control The smoke detector has been activated.
ON
[YES]) To reset the fault the detector must be OFF

and to activate the RESET input.
350 FA_PCV_EN_CSB Only in event of Type III positioning. Reduced deceleration distance.
TH
Detects (except on terminal floors) if the speed Lesser number of CS screens in CU, CB in
change point is inside the CSB screen. Recovers CO.
immediately after a normal stop or an
AN
emergency stop.
351 FA_STOP_OUT_CSB Only in event of Type III positioning. Very large stop delay.
Detects when normal stop has occurred outside Reduced deceleration distance.
the CSB screen. Recovers immediately after the
stop.

Device Control

352 FA_EVA3_CLOSED_RUN Only if hydraulic lift Bucher EN81-1/2 Annex 3. Electric valve failure.
It is detected when the SMA signal of the
electric valve remains active during the car trip
or remains active after a maximum of 6 seconds
12
after disconnecting contactors.
353 FA_EVA3_OPENED_STOP Only if hydraulic lift Bucher EN81-1/2 Annex 3. Electric valve failure.
12
It is detected when the SMA signal , after
T.Act.EV_A3 time after VO speed level
disappears
, is not activated.
20
354 FA_GMV_NORDY_STOP Only if hydraulic lift GMV EN81-1/2 Annex 3. VRP valve failure.
It is detected when the READY signal (E8 of PB)
G_
is not activated when the lift car is stopped.
355 FA_GMV_NORUN_RUN Only if hydraulic lift GMV EN81-1/2 Annex 3. VB valve failure.
It is detected when the RUN signal (E6 of PB) is
IN
not activated during the car trip.
356 FA_GMV_RDY_RUN Only if hydraulic lift GMV EN81-1/2 Annex 3. RDY relay output failure. See GMV
It is detected when the READY signal (E8 if PB) handbook.
FT
remains active during the car trip.
357 FA_GMV_RUN_STOP Only if hydraulic lift GMV EN81-1/2 Annex 3. RUN relay output failure. See GMV
It is detected when the RUN signal (E7 of handbook.
500 FA_24VDC_SUPPLY
LI
PB)remains active when the car is stopped.
Fault of the 24VDC power supply circuit. Voltage drop or circuit fault.
502 FA_PHASE_FAULT It occurs when the phase fault and inversion Check supply voltage of three-phase system
AG
circuit (board PBCM) is activated. and/or change the connection of two of the
phases.
Review PIC parameterization (CT. 5.C.1)
_T
505 FA_POWER_SHUTDOWN Supply voltage to PBCM main board has been This fault may also occur in the event of a
cut off. CPU malfunction, e.g. watchdog fault.
Can also occur in the event of CPU malfunction.
ER
For example, watchdog fault.

506 FA_LINEA_MAN It detects a single-phase power supply failure Fault of the power line.
that supplies Fault of CS input of PBCM.
IN
Exclusively to the main controller. Logical inadequate input.

The failure is detected by the CS input in the Parameterization improper or type of
PBCM board.
RD
positioning different than Type III.

The parameter CT 5.1.7.3 'TMB Alim.Man.Ind'
must be enabled.
They recovered immediately eradicate the
GA
causes which have led to Fault.
507 FA_ALUMBRADO_CABINA It detects a car lighting power supply fault. Fault of lighting power supply.
Y_
The failure is detected by E5 input in the Fault of E5 Input.

extension 5.52 board. Logical inadequate input.
ON
The parameter CT 5.1.7.3 'TMB Cntr.Luz Cab' Parameterization improper.

must be enabled.
600 FA_NUM_STOPS_WELL_EXP The number of floors detected during the lift Check correct fitting of magnets in the
L well exploration does not coincide with the real enclosure according to the lift installation
TH
value (see CT.5.1 Nr. of floors, ground floor). specifications.

This is a positioning type fault. Verify if the intermediate magnet fixing
brackets have been mounted in an area in
AN
which there are CS and CB magnets.

In software versions older than 1.48, the
fault can originate in a problem of
parameters erasure.

Device Control

602 FA_V>03_OPEN_DOOR_MO During a movement with the doors open, the Drive fault, fault of the speed level detection
V speed exceeded 0.3m/s (input V03 turned device PCV or of the control.
on).This fault is detected only if parameter Wrong parameterization of PIC (CT 5.C.5)
5.3.4.1.1 'Control V03' is enabled. It is a
12
memorised fault.
603 FA_V>03_LEVELLING_MOV During a movement that started at levelling Drive fault, fault of the speed level detection
speed (V0), the actual speed exceeded 0.3m/s device PCV or of the control
12
(input V03 turns on).This fault is detected only if Wrong parameterization of PIC (CT 5.C.5)
parameter 5.3.4.1.1 'Control V03' is enabled. It
is a stored type fault.
20
604 FA_PERMANENT_OVERLOAD System detected that the car overload input SC Check:
(EXT. 4.0 or PBCM) remained on during a preset The load of the car
time (30 sec.).Check input status with the CT.
The setting of the overload contact SC, etc.
G_
605 FA_VERTICAL_COMMUNICA There is no connection with the nodes of the The nodes do not answer
TIONS Vertical Bus.
607 FA_NO_CO_ZEROING This fault is detected when point 32 has been If the lower travel limit switch operated, this
IN
cut during the zeroing process, although the could mean that the switch CO wasnt
switch CO was not on. activated correctly.
608 FA_LOWER_NUM_CB_CO_Z The fault is detected when point 32 has been cut If the lower travel limit switch operated, this
FT
EROING during the levelling in the zeroing process could mean that the number of magnets
detected in the area where CO is on is less
than as set in parameter N.Magnets CB in
CO.(see CT's menu 7.).
609 FA_SHORT_DIST_CO_REF_
MOV seeking movement within CO.
LI
Detects when point 32 is cut off in a reference If lower limit switch has been activated it
may be that:
The distance at which the CO switch is
AG
activated is short in relation to drive
deceleration distance.
In type I positioning, the speed change
_T
magnet for descending from the lower

terminal floor is badly installed (very close to
the levelling point for that floor).
ER
In type II and III positioning:

Parameter 5.4.3.1 CO Distance is too large
compared to actual CO distance.
IN
In controlled drives:
o That parameter 5.4.3.1 Dist_B_Vinsp is
small in relation to drive deceleration
RD
distance.
o That parameter CT 4.3.A.1 Lower
terminal floor descent delay is too large
GA
(only for type III positioning)

610 FA_NO_CU_WELL_EXPL This fault is detected when point 32 has been If the upper travel limit switch operated, this
cut during movements of lift well exploration, could mean that the switch CU wasnt
Y_
although the switch CU was not on. activated correctly.

611 FA_LOWER_NUM_CS_CU_W It is detected when point 32 has been cut during If the upper travel limit switch operated, this
ELL_EXPL the lift well exploration with CU on. could mean that the number of magnets CS
detected in the area where CU is on is less
ON
than as set in parameter N.Magnets CS in

CU(see CT's menu 7.)
TH
AN

Device Control

612 FA_SHORT_DIST_CO_RECO Detected when point 32 is cut off during a shaft If the upper limit switch has been activated
GN_MOV recognition movement within CU. it may be that:
The distance at which the CU switch is
activated is small compared to drive
12
deceleration distance.
With type I positioning, the upper terminal
floor up direction speed change screen is
12
incorrectly installed (very close to the
levelling point for that floor).
In type II and II positioning:
20
Parameter 5.4.3.1 CU Distance is too large
compared to actual CU distance.
That the shaft recognition speed
G_
deceleration distance parameter is too small
for the drive deceleration distance.
That parameter CT 4.3.A.1 Upper terminal
IN
floor ascent delay is too large (only for type
III positioning)
613 FA_CO_PERMANENT_ZEROI This fault is detected when point 32 is cut and If the upper travel limit switch operated, this
FT
NG CO remains on, during a zeroing movement that could mean that the switch CO wasnt
started with CO on. disconnected correctly.
617 FA_CO_PERMANENT_IN_WE This fault is detected when switch CU makes and The position switch is damaged. The CO
LL_EXPL_ZEROING CO remains on during a lift well exploration or position signal does not turn off. This may
This is a positioning type fault.

LI
zeroing movement that starts with CO on. be due to a wrong fitting of the magnets.
AG
618 FA_CU_PERMANENT_IN_ZE This fault is detected when switch CO makes The position switch is damaged. The CU
ROING and CU remains on during a zeroing movement. position signal does not turn off.
This is a positioning type fault. This may be due to a wrong fitting of the
magnets.
_T
619 FA_LEVELLING_BOTTOM_LE It is detected when the lowest floor is reached in Problems with the encoder.
VEL a reference searching movement. For positioning
type II/III, it indicates that no pulse is received
ER
at the encoder.
This fault is positioning type.
630 FA_EXT_3.0 Node 3.0 disconnected or defective. Problems with the bus
IN
631 FA_EXT_3.1 Node 3.1 (second door)disconnected or Problems with the bus
defective node.
RD
632 FA_EXT_4.0 Node 4.0 disconnected or defective. Problems with the bus
633 FA_NO_COM_VERTICAL There is no communication with any node of the Vertical bus is disconnected or fault of the
vertical bus. control
GA
634 FA_COM_PIC Communication fault of device PIC on board Device PIC deprogrammed
PBCM Change PBCM
658 FA_MYASSERT There is no cause.
Y_
800 FA_TMAX_TRAVEL The time of one travel exceeded the setting of Problems with the car movement (slipping,
parameter 'Max Travelling' (see CT.5.3.3). obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, brake
For zeroing and lift well exploration journeys, will not open, etc.)
ON
this time is increased by 15 seconds and The parameter value is inadequate, etc.
moreover this fault is not checked if the Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
travelling speed is less than the rated speed. speed).
TH
801 FA_TMAX_LEVELLING The levelling time (Speed change on stopping) Problems with the car movement (slipping,
exceeded the value set in parameter 'Max obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
Levelling' (see 5.3.3) Wrong location of magnets.
AN
This fault is also detected when the a.m. time is Inadequate parameter value, etc.
exceeded during the floor-to-floor and recovery
journeys that start at levelling speed (V0). As for Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
hydraulic drives, the a.m. time is increased by speed).
parameter 'Travel t.' (see CT 5.3.3.) when
starting is in the up direction.

Device Control

802 FA_TMAX_LEVELLING_ZERO During a zeroing journey, the levelling time Problems with the car movement (slipping,
ING (speed change on stopping) exceeded the value obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.)
set in parameter Max Lev.Zeroing/W.EXPL (see The parameter value is inadequate, etc.
CT 5.3.3).
Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
12
speed).
803 FA_TMAX_JOURNEY_LOW_E In a hydraulic lift, the time of a journey to the Problems with the car movement (slipping,
XTR_HYDRAULIC lower extreme point exceeded the value set in obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.)
12
parameter 'T.MAX LLH' (see CT. 5.3.5) The parameter value is inadequate
Wrong location of magnets. etc.
20
speed).
804 FA_SLIPPING Only if positioning type is II. Problems with the car movement (slipping,
G_
System detected that the car moved more slowly obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.)
than planned. The distance the car must run is Problems with the encoder of the over speed
calculated from the speed and acceleration data governor.
(see CT. 5.3.2).
IN
Problems on board PBCM.
Monitoring starts a certain time after the lift Parameter Centi.mm/pulse Menu 5.4.3.4. is
starts, parameter 'Travel t.' (see CT. 5.3.3). inadequate.
FT
speed).
Incorrect speed parameters (Value_Vxx
805 FA_TMAX_LEVELLING_WELL
_EXPL
LI
During the lift well exploration, the levelling time
(speed change on stopping) exceeded the value
Menu 5.3.2).
Problems with the car movement (slipping,
obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.)
set in parameter Max Lev.Zeroing/W.EXPL (see
AG
Inadequate parameter setting, etc.
CT. 5.3.3).
speed)
_T
806 FA_TMAX_EXITING_CO_ZER During a zeroing movement, the time for exiting Problems with the car movement (slipping,
OING CO exceeded the value set in parameter Max obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
Lev.Zeroing/W.EXPL (see CT. 5.3.3). As for Inadequate parameter setting.
hydraulic drives, the a.m. time is increased by
ER
parameter 'Travel t.' (see CT 5.3.3.) when Switch CO does not turn off, etc.
starting is in the up direction. Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
speed).
IN
850 FA_TMAX_IN_CS Only if positioning type is I: Problems with the car movement (slipping,
The time passed by the car in a magnet CS, obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, , etc.).
during a run command, exceeded the value set Wrong location of magnets.
RD
in parameter 'T. in CSCB' (see 5.4.2). Incorrect setting of parameter T.in CSCB.
As for hydraulic drives, monitoring starts after a Pick-up CS permanently on.
delay when starting is in the up direction (see
Etc.
GA
CT. 5.3.3. 'Travel t.').

speed).
Y_
In hydraulic drives, the value of parameter

T.Desplaza 5.3.3 is too small. Recommended
value: 100
851 FA_TMAX_IN_CB Only if positioning type is I. Problems with the car movement (slipping,
ON
The time passed by the car in a magnet CB, obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
during a run command, exceeded the value set Wrong location of magnets.
in parameter 'T. in CSCB' (see 5.4.2). Incorrect setting of parameter T.in CSCB.
TH
As for hydraulic drives, monitoring starts after a Pick-up CB permanently on, etc.
CT. 5.3.3. 'Travel t.'). Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
AN
speed)

Device Control

852 FA_TMAX_NO_CS Only if positioning type is I. Problems with the car movement (slipping,
The time passed without any magnet CS being obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
detected, during a run command, exceeded the Wrong location of magnets.
value set in parameter 'T. out CSCB' (see 5.4.2). Incorrect setting of parameter T.no CSCB.
12
As for hydraulic drives, monitoring starts after a Pick-up CS permanently off, etc.
delay (parameter CT 5.3.3. 'Travel t.' when
starting is in the up direction. Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
12
speed)
853 FA_TMAX_NO_CB Only if positioning type is I. Problems with the car movement (slipping,
The time passed without any magnet CB being obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
20
detected, during a run command, exceeded the Wrong location of magnets.
value set in parameter 'T. out CSCB' (see5.4.2). Incorrect setting of parameter T. no CSCB.
As for hydraulic drives, monitoring starts after a Pick-up CB permanently off. etc.
G_
CT. 5.3.3. 'Travel t.'). Problems with the vertical drive (inadequate
speed)
900 FA_NO_CU System did not detect the making of switch CU Switch CU (magnet or switch) does not turn
IN
in upper extreme points zone. Impedes on.
inspection movement in the up direction. This is In positioning system type I:
a positioning type fault.
o Wrong counting or location of magnets
FT
CS, CB.
o Inadequate parameters CT. 5.1 Num of
floors, lower floor.
LI o In software versions older than 1.63, the
fault can originate in a problem of
parameters erasure.
AG
In positioning system type II:
o Error of encoder count.
o Parameter CT. 5.4.3.4 Error CO CU
_T
reduced.
901 FA_NO_CO System did not detect the making of switch CO Switch CO (magnet or switch) does not turn
in the lower extreme points zone. on)
ER
Impedes inspection movement . In positioning system type I:

This is a positioning type fault. o Wrong counting or location of magnets
CS, CB.
IN

o Error of encoder count.
RD
reduced.
902 FA_COCU_ON_SIMULTANEO System detected that pick-ups CO and CU Position switch is missing or damaged.
USLY turned on simultaneously.
GA
One of the position signals CO, CU is not

It may also occur if switches COCU are deactivated. Maybe due to a wrong location
connected to Ext4.0 (parameter 'Reading COCU' of the magnets.
in CT. 5.4.1)and communication with said
Y_
extension is interrupted. In this event, fault

FA_NO_EXT4_0 632 will occur simultaneously.
While CO and CU remain on simultaneously, no
ON
movement whatsoever is permitted except for

the emergency service.
TH
AN

Device Control

903 FA_CU_NOT_IN_ZONE System detected that switch CU turns on outside Position switch is missing or does not turn
its assigned zone for turning on (upper extreme off
point). Wrong location of the magnets.
This is a positioning type fault. In positioning system type I:
12
CS, CB.
12
o Inadequate parameters CT. 5.1.1 Num of
floors, lower floor.
20
o Encoder error.
reduced
G_
904 FA_CO_NOT_IN_ZONE System detected that switch CO turns on outside Position switch is missing or does not turn
its assigned zone for turning on (lower extreme off
point). Wrong location of the magnets.
IN
This is a positioning type fault. In positioning system type I:
CS, CB.
FT
o Encoder error.
905 FA_NO_CS
LI
System detected that a magnet CS is missing.
reduced
Wrong location or detection of magnets CS.
This is a positioning type fault. In positioning system type II:
AG
o Parameter CT. 5.4.3.4 ERROR CS/CB
reduced.
o Problems with the encoder
_T
906 FA_NO_CB System detected that a magnet CB is missing Wrong location or detection of magnets CB.
This is a positioning type fault. In positioning system type II:
ER
o Parameter CT. 5.4.3.4 ERROR CS/CB

reduced.
o Problems with the encoder
IN
907 FA_DISTANCE_BTWN_STOP Only if positioning type is II, III. Wrong fitting or detection of magnets and
_POINTS During a lift well exploration, system detected magnets or error in the positioning system
that the distance between the entry flank for CS set-up parameters.
RD
(Type II) / CSB-low (Type III) and exit flank for

CB (Type II) / CSB-up (Type III) is greater than
the setting of parameter 'ERROR P_S/P_B' (see
5.4.3.4).
GA

908 FA_DISTANCE_CO_WELL_E Only if positioning type is II. Wrong location of magnet CO or error in
Y_
XPL System detected that, after a lift well the positioning system set-up parameters.
exploration, the distance from the switch CO
toggling point to the levelling point of the lower
terminal floor is less than parameter
ON
'Dist_Dn_Vmax' (see 5.4.3.1)

909 FA_DISTANCE_CU_WELL_EX Only if positioning type is II. Wrong location of magnet CU or error in the
TH
PL System detected that, after a lift well positioning system set-up parameters.
exploration, the distance from the switch CU
toggling point to the levelling point of the upper
AN
terminal floor is less than parameter

'Dist_Up_Vmax' (see 5.4.3.1).

Device Control

910 FA_PO_FS_CB_DEC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch.
Systems detects, when entering the upper part
of a magnet CB at a landing, that magnets
counting was incorrect.
12
911 FA_PO_FS_CS_DEC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
12
Systems detects, when entering the upper part
of a magnet CS at a landing, that magnets
20
912 FA_PO_FS_CB_INC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
Systems detects, when entering the lower part
G_
of a magnet CB at a landing, that magnets
IN
913 FA_PO_FS_CS_INC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
Systems detects, when entering the lower part
of a magnet CS at a landing, that magnets
FT
914 FA_PO_FB_CB_DEC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
LI
Systems detects, when exiting the lower part of
a magnet CB at a landing, that magnets
counting was incorrect. This is a positioning type
AG
fault.
915 FA_PO_FB_CS_DEC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
Systems detects, when exiting the lower part of
_T
a magnet CS at a landing, that magnets

This is a positioning type fault
ER
916 FA_PO_FB_CB_INC Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
Systems detects, when exiting the upper part of
a magnet CB at a landing, that magnets
IN

917 FA_PO_FB_CS_INC Only if positioning type is I Position switch is damaged.
RD
Systems detects, when exiting the upper part of Position signal CO remains on. This can be
a magnet CS at a landing, that magnets due to wrong magnet location
GA

918 FA_PO_CSMCB Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
System detects if there is too many activations
Y_
of flank counter CS with respect to flank counter

CB (greater than two).
ON
919 FA_PO_CBMCS Only if positioning type is I Check location of the magnets and switch
System detects if there is too many activations
of flank counter CB with respect to flank counter
TH
CS (greater than two).

AN

Device Control

930 FA_LONG_CSB Only in positioning type III. Verify the position of magnets and switch.
It is detected when the length of the detected Verify the length of the magnets.
magnet is:
Lower than the value on the parameters menu
12
(CT 4.3.A.3 LCSB) minus a fix value (30 mm) or
Bigger than the value on the parameters menu
(CT 4.3.A.3 LCSB) plus a fix value (30 mm).
12
The length detected is the difference between
upper and lower points of the CSB magnet (CT
3.4.4.2.2).
20
It is recovered at the end of the shaft learning, if
the length detected is inside the range
'Parameter plus-minus 30 mm'.
G_
935 FA_FCI_NOSEACTIVA The inspection limit switch FCI for M34 elevators FCI switch failure
with reduced headroom compensatory measures E8 input of PBCM failure
(with carpet and brake)Has not been activated
Switch outside of safety zone
IN
within the specified safe distance.
936 FA_FCIS_NOSEACTIVA The upper inspection limit switch FCIS for M34 FCIS switch failure
elevators with reduced headroom compensatory E4 input of PBCM failure
FT
measures (with carpet and brake)Has not been
activated within the specified safe distance. Switch outside of safety zone
1000 FA_THERMAL_PROBE_MOT This fault occurs when the transducer of Motor overload.
OR maximum motor temperature and of oil
LI
temperature(hydraulic lifts) J35 on PBCM turns
on.
Extreme ambient conditions (cooling).
If parameter CT. 5.3.4.2 is 'THER Immediate'

AG
[NO], the car stops at next floor in floor-to-floor
and recovery journeys.
If parameter CT. 5.3.4.2 is 'THER Immediate'
_T
[YES], in floor-to-floor and recovery journeys,

the car stops at the end of time set in parameter
CT. 5.3.4.2 'Delay THER' [XX]s.
ER
In other types of journeys, the car stops

immediately.
1300 FA_LAP1_NOT_ON_OPENIN This fault occurs if the opening of the door at Fault of door automatism at entrance 1
IN
G entrance 1, when there is no position reference, (obstruction, faulty contact LAP, problems
exceeds the time set in parameter 'Max Door T' with operator, etc.).
(see CT.5.5.4) before the open door limit switch Fault of extension 3.0
LAP1 has been detected.(inputs LAP of extension
RD
3.0) ).
1301 FA_LAP1_PERMANENTLY_O This fault occurs when, the door being closed, it Fault of door automatism at entrance 1.
N starts to open and the open door limit switch Fault of contact LAP1 or its connection.
GA
LAP1 is on
1302 FA_LAP2_NOT_ON_OPENIN This fault occurs if the opening of the door at Fault of door automatism at entrance 2
G entrance 2, when there is no position reference, (obstruction, faulty contact LAP, problems
Y_
exceeds the time set in parameter 'Max Door T' with operator, etc, etc.)
(see CT.5.5.4) before the open door limit switch Fault of extension 3.1
LAP2 has been detected.(inputs LAP of extension
3.1).
ON
1303 FA_LAP2_PERMANENTLY_O This fault occurs when, the door being closed, it Fault of door automatism at entrance 2.
N starts to open and the open door limit switch Fault of contact LAP2 or its connection.
LAP2 is on.
TH
Fault of extension 3.1.

1400 FA_LAP1_NOT_ON_AT_LAN This fault occurs if the opening of the door at Fault of door automatism at entrance 1.
DING entrance 1, when there is a position reference, Obstruction, faulty contact LAP, problems
AN
exceeds the time set in parameter 'Max Door T' with operator, etc...
(see CT. 5.5.4) before the open door limit switch
LAP1 has been detected. (inputs LAP of Check the landing door that caused the
extension (3:0)). fault.
The field 'Xtra Info' shows the logic position of Fault of extension 3.0.4
the landing concerned

Device Control

1450 FA_LAP2_NOT_ON_AT_LAN This fault occurs if the opening of the door at Fault of door automatism at entrance 2
DING entrance 2, when there is a position reference, (Obstruction, faulty contact LAP, problems
exceeds the time set in parameter 'Max Door T' with operator, etc.)
(see CT. 5.5.4) before the open door limit switch Check the landing door that caused the fault
12
LAP2 has been detected. (inputs LAP of
extension 3.1) Fault of extension 3.1.
The field 'Xtra Info' shows the logic position of
12
the landing concerned
1800 AN_LCP1_OFF LCP of entrance 1 remains off. Check door automatism and the closing limit
This anomaly is detected only if parameter 5.5.8 switches of closed door LCP.
20
LCP Entr1 is enabled.
1801 AN_LCP2_OFF LCP of entrance 2 remains off. Check door automatism and the closing limit
This anomaly is detected only if parameter 5.5.8 switches of closed door LCP.
G_
LCP Entr2 is enabled.
1804 AN_VO3_REST This anomaly occurs when variable V03 (speed Incorrect parameterization of the control
greater than 0.3m/s) is on when the car is at (Menu 5.C.5)
IN
rest. If setting of parameter 5.3.4.1.1 Control V03
No open door movements is possible until the is [REG]:
recovery of this anomaly. o Damaged input E1 (hydraulic Beringer)
FT
This anomaly is detected only if parameter o Damaged input E6 (vertical drive type
5.3.4.1.1 Control V03 is set to [PIC] or [REG]. V3F). Only if CT 5.3.4.3 BR Control[NO]
or [C_1]
LI Error in wiring of E1 or E6.
Etc.
1805 AN_V03_NOT_ON_HIGH_SP This anomaly occurs when variable V03 remains Incorrect parameterization of the control
AG
EED off during a movement that starts at a speed (Menu 5.C.5)
level greater than levelling speed (V0).No open If setting of parameter 5.3.4.1.1 Control V03
door movements is possible until the recovery of is [REG]:
_T
this anomaly.
o Damaged input E1 (hydraulic Beringer)
This anomaly is detected only if parameter
5.3.4.1.1 Control V03 is set to [PIC] or [REG]. o Damaged input E6 (vertical drive type
V3F). Only if CT 5.3.4.3 BR Control[NO]
ER
or [C_1]
Error in wiring of E1 or E6.
Etc.
IN
1807 AN_CIRCUIT_JUMP_SECURI During a door open movement, auxiliary circuit Auxiliary circuit of open door movement PPS.
TIES PPS did not jump the door securities. Wrong wiring.
On detecting this anomaly, levelling movements
RD
with open doors are cancelled until the anomaly

is recovered with the CT (to recover the
anomaly, activate CT's function 1.5 FAULT
GA
RECOV.
This anomaly is detected only if the control
includes the 'Re-levelling w/ door open' option
Y_
(see CT. 5.5.3.1 'Relevel DO') or the 'Levelling

w/ door open' option (see CT. 5.5.3.1 'Levelling
DO').
ON
1809 AN_NUM_CONSECUTIVE_NU The control carries out the forced closing of The user constantly interrupts the door
GGING doors (nugging) the maximum number of times movement and activates this function
as set in parameter nugging (see CT. 5.5.3.2). continually.
Fault of the photocell or barrier-induced
TH
reopening circuit.
1810 AN_NO_HORIZONTAL_COM There is no communication with the horizontal Horizontal bus disconnected, other controls
bus. of the group current less, fault of the
AN
control.
1811 AN_OUT_DOOR_ZON_MOV_ There is no cause.
DO

Device Control

1812 AN_OVERRUN_RESCUE This anomaly is detected when the car stops Excess speed of rescue movement.
outside the overlapping zone of the landing
magnets during the redirection to a floor in
rescue mode .
12
This movement is done by the rescue system
automatically in case of fault of power to the
electric drives.
12
1813 AN_CC_PERMANENT The full load switch CCC remains permanently Check adjustment of switch CCC, displayed
on. The anomaly is detected when, the car being in CT. 3.1.
at rest, the full load switch CCC remains on for
20
30 seconds without any car call being registered.
2000 AN_TMAX_RELEV_UP During normal re-levelling (at speed V0) in the Problems with the car movement (slipping,
up direction, the maximum permissible time (see obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
CT. 5.3.3 'Re-levelling') was exceeded.
G_
In hydraulic drives, the a.m. time is increased by
the value set in parameter 5.3.3. 'Travel t.'.
IN
2050 AN_TMAX_RELEV_DN During normal re-levelling (at speed V0) in the Problems with the car movement (slipping,
down direction, the maximum permissible time obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.).
(see CT. 5.3.3 Re-levelling) was exceeded. Inadequate parameter setting, etc.
FT
2100 AN_TMAX_FINE_REL_UP During inching (at speed V00) in the up Problems with the car movement (slipping,
direction, the maximum permissible time (see obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.)
CT. 5.3.3 Re-levelling) was exceeded). Inadequate parameter setting, etc.
2150 AN_TMAX_FINE_REL_DN LI
During inching (at speed V00) in the down
direction, the maximum permissible time (see
CT. 5.3.3 Re-levelling) was exceeded).
Problems with the car movement (slipping,
obstacle, lack of oil in hydraulic lifts, etc.)
AG
2151 AN_CONSECUTIVE_RELEVEL During re-levelling, the car stopped in the Re-levelling speed (V0 or V00) is too high.
opposite re-levelling zone. In the event of normal re-levelling (speed
V0), magnets CS/CB overlapping is small.
_T
In the event of inching (speed V00) value of

parameter Dist_V00 is small.
2200 FIRE AT FLOOR This anomaly occurs when the input of floor The fire detector operated at one floor.
ER
cancellation in case of fire turns on.

The Xtra Info field shows the number of the
floor concerned.
IN
The anomaly is detected only if parameter 5.A.1

'Enable Smoke SW' is enabled.
2264 AN_STARTS_ROPE The anomaly occurs when the number of starts Number of starts exceeded the setting of
RD
exceeded the setting of parameter 5.3.4.8 parameter 5.3.4.8 LIM.ROPE AN.

'Lim.Rope An'.
It applies to M33/M34 lifts: parameter 'Enable
GA
Rope Fa' is [YES]

IMPORTANT: Change the ropes.
2265 AN_NO_TEL_LINE System detected that the autodialler telephone Fault of the autodialler telephone line.
Y_
line has been cut for a while.

2266 AN_CEM2_REMAINS_OFF This contactor is not controlled presently.
2267 AN_CEM2_STUCK This contactor is not controlled presently.
ON
2268 AN_AL_INV_RESC During a rescue with own inverter, a regulator Problems with the regulator.
alarm was detected. UPS voltage too low.
TH
2269 AN_DROP_CONTACT_RESC_ During a rescue with own inverter, system UPS voltage too low.
INV detected that one contactor dropped.
2270 AN_CEM1_REMAINS_OFF At the beginning of a rescue movement with The contactor does not make.
own regulator, contactor CEM1 remains off.
AN
2271 AN_TMAX_RESCUE The time of redirection to a floor in rescue mode Problems with the car movement (slipping,
with electric drive exceeded the setting of obstacle, etc.)
parameter T.Max.Res (see CT. 5.3.3).This Inadequate parameter setting.
anomaly aborts the rescue movement in
progress and prevents new rescue movements Problems with the rescue system
to be performed. It is recovered using the CT (inadequate speed).
and/or by entering the inspection mode.

Device Control

2272 AN_F24_RESCUING This anomaly occurs when the 24V power supply Flat batteries of the UPS.
fails or drops (below 16V approx.) during the
redirection of an electric lift to a floor in the
rescue mode.
12
This anomaly aborts the rescue movement in
progress and prevents new rescue movements
to be performed.
12
To be able to carry out a new rescue, enable
CT's function 1.5 FAULT RECOV.
2273 AN_EXT5.15 This anomaly occurs when extension 5.15 is Extension 5.15 is dropped.
20
dropped, only in regulated drives. Vertical CAN bus failure.
dropped, only if smoke control is activated (CT Vertical CAN bus failure.
G_
5.3.4.C).
dropped, only any of the following controls is Vertical CAN bus failure.
IN
activated.
'Enable Firemen's' (CT 5.9.2)
'Enable evacuat.' (CT 5.9.3)
FT
'Enable IAU' (CT 5.9.9)
'Enable AF' (CT 5.9.8)
'Enable ANU' (CT 5.9.A)
2276 AN_EXT5.AI
'Enable GEN' (CT 5.B.1)
LI
This anomaly occurs when any Extension 5.3 to Any extension 5.0 to 5.13 is dropped.
AG
5.13 is dropped, only if Cancel if fire (CT 5.A.1) Vertical CAN bus error.
function is activated.
2336 AN_BUSOFF_V The anomaly occurs each increment of 'Times Fatal error in Vertical CAN bus.
Bus OFF' and with parameter 'Ena.CntrlBusOFF'
_T
activated. The anomaly is recovered after a

'T.Recov.BusOFF' time without increment of
'Times Bus OFF' or with parameter
ER
'Ena.CntrlBusOFF' deactivated. See menu 4.3.8.

2338 AN_INI_BUSV The anomaly occurs when an error in the Fatal error in Vertical CAN bus.
initialization of the Vertical CAN Bus has been Check cables, PBCM CAN transceiver, other
IN
detected. After the anomaly, communications in nodes in Bus V, etc.

Bus V are incorrect or do no exist. It is
recovered if after a reset the initialization is
correct. If other faults as AV. 605, 630, 631,
RD
632, 633, 902, etc. are detected, please check if

this anomaly is detected.
2339 AN_INI_BUSH The anomaly occurs when an error in the Fatal error in the Horizontal CAN bus.
GA
initialization of the Horizontal CAN Bus has been Check cables, GONGCAN device, other nodes
detected. After the anomaly, communications in in Bus H, etc.
Bus H are incorrect or do no exist. The control
Y_
works as a simplex. It is recovered if after a

reset the initialization is correct or parameter CT
5.1.2 'Hor.Com.' is [NO].
2340 AN_NO_TLSV The anomaly occurs when it is detected that the Autodialler is dropped.
ON
autodialler is not present in the CAN Bus. Only if Fatal error in Vertical CAN bus.
using Orona's autodialler. See parameter 'xxxx'
TH
AN

Device Control

2341 AN_NO_PQ0 It is detected when Orona's weighing system 0 Weighing system 0 is not connected.
is not connected. Vertical CAN bus failure.
Only if one of the following functions is active:
Load measure using Orona's weighing system
12
(CT 5.7 Enable LWS [ONE])
Regulated autonomous rescue (CT 5.3.4.4 Type
Rescue [REG] and CEM1_2 Read[PQ])
12
Machine room's temperature measure by NTC of
the Orona's weighing device (CT 5.3.4.5
MRTemp_read [REG/BAJAR/SUBIR/Q])
20
It is recovered if it is detected that Orona's
weighing system 0 is connected or if all the
previous functions are disabled.
G_
2342 AN_NO_PQ1 It detects missing the load transmitter with ID 0 Weighing system 1 is not connected.
in the CAN Bus. Vertical CAN bus failure.
Only in installations with suspension 1:1 and
IN
load measuring with Orona's weighing system
(CT 5.7 Enable LWS [TWO] or Enable LWS
[UNO_R].)
FT
It is recovered if it is detected that Orona's
weighing system 0 is connected or if load
measure function is disabled or type of
installation is changed.
2343 AN_EXT5_NOD31
LI
Is detected that the Extension 5.31 stays out in
the Bus CAN communication.
Stay out the Extension 5.31.
Fault in the vertical Bus communication.
Only in lifts with CT 5.A.6.1 Enable S.A.T [AUTO]
AG
or [MF].
2344 AN_EXT5_NOD32 Is detected that the Extension 5.32 stays out in Stay out the Extension 5.32.
the Bus CAN communication.
_T
Fault in the vertical Bus communication.

Only in lifts with CT 5.A.6.1 Enable S.A.T [AUTO]
or [MF].
2345 AN_CN_PERMANENTE_OFF It detects when the drive is not turned on after a Error in the controller or failure in reading
ER
while CT 5.3.4.F 'T.ALREG.CN ON' after the firing E5.

order.
Only if CT 5.3.4.F 'Off. REG.CN' is on.
IN
2346 AN_CN_PERMANENTE_ON It detects when the drive is not turned off after Error in the controller or failure in reading
a while CT 5.3.4.F 'T.ALREG.CN ON' after the E5.
turn on order.
RD
Only if CT 5.3.4.F 'Off. REG.CN' is on.

2347 AN_NOFRENANDO_REPOSO It detects if any of the brake arms at rest stops. Brake not holding back. One arm has been
opened.
GA
It detects if it is off the brake damage control

(CT 5.3.4.3 Disable AV FR) FR and if control is microswitch arm incorrectly adjusted or
different from [NO] (CT 5.3.4.3, CT 7): damaged.
[c_1]: It is verified by PBCM E9.
Y_
[c_2]: It is checked by PBCM E9 and E6.

[C_3]: It is checked by E9, E6 and E7 PBCM.
ON
[C_4]: It is checked by E9, E6, E7 and E8 of

PBCM.
TH
AN

Device Control

2348 AN_FRENANDO_MARCHA Brake holding back on. One of the arms did not microswitch arm incorrectly adjusted or
open when running After a while T.Ret.FR (CT damaged.
5.3.4.3), or dropped while running for a Longer incorrect connection to the brake coil.
than T.FR. (CT 5.3.4.3).
brake coil defective.
12
It detects if it is off the brake damage control
(CT 5.3.4.3 Disable AV FR) FR and if control is No connection E9, E6, E7 or E8 to PBCM.
different from [NO] (CT 5.3.4.3, CT 7):
12
[C_1]: It is verified by PBCM E9.
[C_2]: It is checked by PBCM E9 and E6.
[C_3]: It is checked by E9, E6 and E7 PBCM.
20
[C_4]: It is checked by E9, E6, E7 and E8 of
PBCM.
2349 AN_EXT5_NOD16 Extension 5.16 is not detected in the Bus CAN. Extension 5.16 Failure.
G_
Only if the lift is EN81-1/2 Annex 3. Vertical Bus failure.
2400 AN_V>03_AT_STOP_POINT The anomaly occurs when speed exceeds 0.3m/s Faulty parameterization of PIC (CT. 5.C.5)
when reaching the stopping point (Type II) /
IN
Insufficient levelling distance:
CSB detection point (Type III) during the
levelling process. It is detected only if parameter o If positioning type is I: correct the speed
5.3.4.1.1 'Control V03' is enabled. change magnets.
FT
o If positioning type is II: parameterize the
deceleration distance adequately acc. to
drive.
LI If deceleration is too smooth, this distance

can be reduced, if the drive is the variable
type.
o Faulty drive.
AG
o Speed relay circuit PCV (set-up].
o Wrong wiring, etc.
_T
2402 AN_OVERRUN_MINUS In positioning type II/III: Problems with stopping:

After its stopping, the car parked before the Location of stopping magnet.
levelling point less the setting of parameter Brake adjustment.
ER
'ERROR Overrunn' (5.4.3.4).

Parameter Dist ERR. Reb. (5.4.3.4) too
In positioning type I: small.
After its stopping, the car parked before the etc.
IN
levelling zone (the levelling zone is the

intersection of CS and CB) but within the door
zone (CS or CB on).
RD
2403 AN_OVERRUN_PLUS In positioning type II/III: This may be due to several causes:
After its stopping, the car parked beyond the The deceleration distance required by the
levelling point plus the setting of parameter drive is greater than that provided by the
ERROR Overrunn' (5.4.3.4). positioning system (In positioning type I
GA
In positioning type I: correct the speed change magnets. In

positioning type II parameterize adequately
After its stopping, the car parked beyond the acc. to drive.)
Y_
levelling zone (the levelling zone is the

intersection of CS and CB) but within the door If deceleration is too smooth, this distance
zone (CS or CB on). can be reduced, if the drive is the variable
type or faulty.
The car reaches the stopping point (Type II) or
ON
CSB point (Type III) at excess speed. Problems with stopping:

Location of stopping magnet.
Brake adjustment
TH
Parameter Dist ERR. Reb. (5.4.3.4) too

small, etc.
AN

Device Control

2406 AN_STOP_OUTSIDE_DOOR_ Only in positioning system type I. The deceleration distance required by the
ZONE System detected that the car, after stopping, drive is greater than that provided by the
parked outside the door zone(CS and CB are positioning system (In positioning type I
off). correct the speed change magnets. In
12
positioning type II parameterize adequately
The car reaches the stopping point (Type II) or acc. to drive.)
CSB point (Type III) at excess speed
If deceleration is too smooth, this distance
12
can be reduced, if the drive is the variable
type or faulty.
Problems with stopping:
20
Location of stopping magnet.
Brake adjustment, etc.
2407 LAST START_CPU There is no cause.
G_
2414 AN_CHECKSUMSTORAGE At the start of the control, system detects that Power supply fault during the storing of the
the checksum of the (parameters) FLASH does parameters.
not coincide with the previously stored Important: Immediately after a lift well
IN
checksum. exploration, the control stores the
In this event, the installation's default parameters automatically. It is therefore
parameters are retrieved. advisable not to switch power off
FT
immediately after a lift well exploration.
The battery is not connected, i.e. switch
SW201 on CPU board is OFF. It must be set
to ON.
2415 AN_CHECKSUMBATTERY
LI
At the start of the control, system detects that
The battery is flat or makes bad contact.
The battery is not connected, i.e. switch
AG
the checksum of the battery-powered SW201 on CPU board is OFF. It must be set
(parameters) RAM does not coincide with the to ON.
previously stored checksum. The battery is flat or makes bad contact.
_T
Power was switched off during the

modification of parameters.
A new SW version has been loaded in the
CPU.
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

Device Control
7. Device Autodialler
Teleservicio2005 Node. This device centralizes all the acoustic functions of the car (Autodialler,
Voice Synthesis, Car Gong and the Intercom). It meets the EN81-28 European standard. For
12
more information about this node and all it's functionalities, refer to the ORONA 0466008
standard.
12
7.1. Table of menus of Autodialler
20
Lift Alarm's main menu entry
1 FAULTS
G_
IN
1.1 LAST FAULT
Shows the last happened fault
FT
*1.1. LAST FAULT *

No.
1
Mark Possible Values LI Description
Shows which has been the last fault happened in the
Fault.No (1) Autodialler
AG
Anom.No (2) Shows which has been the last anomaly happened in the
2
Even.No (3) Autodialler
Shows which has been the last event happened in the
_T
3 Autodialler
1.2 FAULTS LIST

ER
Faults list
IN

RD
*1.2. FAULTS LIST * 1

0)(1)... (2)
1)()... () 2 ON, OFF

GA
1.2.1 FAULT NAME

Y_

ON

*1.2.1. (n)-XXXXXXX* 1 Part identifying the time.

TH
Started (1)
(2) 2 Part identifying the date.
Ended (3)
AN
(4) 3 Part identifying the time.

Inf1(5)

Inf2(6) 4 Part identifying the date.
Data1 (7)

5 Maximum: 15 characters
Data2
Data3
(8)
(9)

Data4 (10)
Device Autodialler

Data5 (11) 7
Data6 (12)
Delete? [13] 8
12
9
10
12
11
12
20
13 NO, YES Erases the selected fault
G_
1.3 ANOMAL.LIST
IN
FT
*1.3. ANOMAL.LIST * 1
0)(1)... (2)
2 ON, OFF LI
1.3.1 ANOMALY NAME
AG
1.4 SYSTEM EVENTS
_T
List of all the system events happened.

ER

IN
*1.4. SYSTEM EVENTS* 1

0)(1)... (2)
2 ON, OFF

RD
1.4.1 EVENT NAME

GA
Detailed menu with the event characteristics.

Y_

*1.4.1. (n)-XXXXXXX* Part identifying the time.
ON
1
Started (1)
(2) 2 Part identifying the date.
Ended (3)
TH
(4) 3 Part identifying the time.

Inf1(5)

Inf2(6) 4 Part identifying the date.

AN
Data1 (7)
Data2
Data3
(8)
(9)

Data4
Data5
(10)
(11)

Data6 (12) 7
Delete? [13]
8
Device Autodialler

9
10
12
11
12
12
13 NO, YES Erases the selected fault
1.6 DELETE LISTS
20
Permits deleting the deactivated Faults, Anomalies and Events of the system.
G_
IN
*1.6. DELETE LISTS * 1 Fau.to OFF deleted Erases the elements of the database that are set to OFF.
Delete Faults [1]
Delete Anomalies[2] 2 Ano.to OFF deleted Erases the elements of the database that are set to OFF.
FT
Delete Events [3]
3 Eve.to OFF deleted Erases the elements of the database that are set to OFF.

2 EVENT TRACE
LI
AG
List of happened events
_T
3 VARIABLES
Lift Alarm node's variables

ER
3.1 GENERALS
IN
General variables
RD

*3.1. GENERALS * 1 NO, YES States whether the autodialler is or is not in the

GA
Lift Alarm mode (1) Autodialler mode.

View IOs [2] NO, YES Displays the values of the inputs and outputs.
2
Manager Connec(3)
Y_
SW Version(4) 3 NO, YES Denotes the status of the connection with the ARCAII
SW Date(5) controller.
4 Maximum: 12 characters Installed software version.

ON
5 Maximum: 12 characters Software compilation date.

TH
3.2 BATTERY
Variables related to the battery
AN
3.3 LINE
Variables related to the PSTN

Device Autodialler

*3.3. LINE * 1 NO, YES Monitors the phone line RING Call Progress tones status.
Ring (1)
NO, YES Monitors the phone line status. If there is or isn't.
12
LineTone (2) 2
Congestion (3)
Busy (4) 3 NO, YES Monitors the phone line GSM BATTERY ERROR Call
Calling (5)
Progress tones status.
12
LineToneBat (6) 4 NO, YES Monitors the phone line BUSY Call Progress tones status.

5 NO, YES Monitors the phone line CALLING Call Progress tones

20
status.
6 NO, YES Monitor del estado de la seal de ERROR BATERIA GSM
en la lnea telefnica.
G_
3.4 INPUTS
IN
Variables related to the node's inputs
FT
*3.4. INPUTS * 1 OFF, ON Shows the status of the inputs used in normal mode of
Car Alarm
RoofFloor Al.
(1)
(2)
2

OFF, ON
LI the Autodialler
Shows the status of the inputs used in normal mode of
the Autodialler
AG
3.5 OUTPUTS
_T
Variables related to the node's outputs

ER

IN
*3.5. OUTPUTS * 1 OFF, ON Shows and allows to set the outputs of the Autodialler
Picto.Yello [1]
Picto.Green [2] 2 OFF, ON Shows and allows to set the outputs of the Autodialler
Cont. Alarm [3]
RD
3 OFF, ON Shows and allows to set the outputs of the Autodialler

GA
3.6 STAIRS INPUTS

Variables related to the statistic generator functionality of the autodialler when installed with a
Y_
mechanical stair controller

ON

*3.6. STAIRS INPUTS* 1 NO, YES Displays Teleservice inputs in Mechanical Stair Monitoring
TH
STOP Button (1) Mode.

Start/Stop (2) NO, YES Displays Teleservice inputs in Mechanical Stair Monitoring
2
Est.CuentaPers (3) Mode.
AN
Fault (4)
3 NO, YES Displays Teleservice inputs in Mechanical Stair Monitoring
Sta/Stop Timer (5) Mode.
STOP But.Num.(6)
Users Num. (7) 4 NO, YES Displays Teleservice inputs in Mechanical Stair Monitoring
Faults Num. (8)
Mode.
T.STOP But. (9) 5 NO, YES Displays Teleservice inputs in Mechanical Stair Monitoring
T.StartTimer (10) Mode.

Device Autodialler

Start T. (11) 6 Only for monitoring mechanical stairs. Displays the
Stop T. (12) number of up sides for the balustrade Stop input .
BrokeDown T. (13) Only for monitoring mechanical stairs. Number of users
7 who have used the stairs.
12
8 Only for monitoring mechanical stairs. Displays the
number of faults for the stairs.
Only for monitoring mechanical stairs. Displays the
12
9 number of balustrade stops for the stairs in the period
10 Only for monitoring mechanical stairs. Displays time in
minutes, that the stairs can operate by Clock
20
programming.
minutes, that the stairs are moving.
G_
minutes, that the stars are stopped (even without fault)
13 Only for monitoring mechanical stairs. Displays how long
IN
stairs have been faulty.
FT
4 FUNCTIONS
Functions of the Lift Alarm

4.1 MAINTENANCE
LI
Functions related to the maintenance
AG
4.1.1 PARAMETERS
_T
Functions related to the parameters

ER

*4.1.1. PARAMETERS * 1 Params Saved This button fulfils actions over the parameters of the
IN
Save Params.. [1] node. It can save the parameters or take out the default
Store Pend. (2) ones for example.
2 NO, YES Shows if the parameters of the Autodialler 2005 are

RD
pending to be saved (if they have been modified).
4.1.2 TESTS
GA
This menu includes some test functions to ease the testing of the correct fitting of the Lift
alarm
Y_

Mark
ON
No. Possible Values Description

*4.1.2. TESTS * 1 Test Started Used to generate test Calls from the equipment. These
Start voice Test[1] Calls need to be done with one of the EN81_28_XX DTMF
TH
Start Ciclic Tes[2] protocols activated.

VoiceTestMode [3] Test Started Used to generate test Calls from the equipment. These
2
TimeOVoiceTe[4]s Calls need to be done with one of the EN81_28_XX DTMF
protocols activated.
AN

Device Autodialler

3 NO, YES Starts Voice Test procedure: First, equipment is placed in
Voice Test mode (set this variable to [YES] ) and
afterwards a call is made to the Call Centre (using
different numbers to those used for the alarm call,
12
designated as TVozX in menu 5.4.2.) where the voice test
call will be registered. Although for the porterthe voice
test call is identical to an alarm call, at the Call Centre
they will know that it is a test call and will be recorded as
12
such in the Call Centre data base. Whilst voice test mode
is active and car calls generate voice test calls, the
pictograms will blink alternately. To exit voice test mode
20
enter NO for the previous value, or wait for the timeout,
configurable in variable Timeout TestV[XX]s, or Perform a
Voice Test correctly.
G_
4 Units: [s] Once put the equipment in voice test mode, this
Default value: 288 parameter sets the maximum time before a timeout will
put the autodialler in normal mode again.
IN
4.1.3 INSTALLATION
Functions related to the installation where the lift alarm is.
FT
4.1.4 DEFAULT PARAMS.
Functions to manage the factory default parameters.
LI
AG
*4.1.4. DEFAULT PAR* 1 Default loaded This button fulfils actions over the parameters of the
Load Default Par[1] node. It can save the parameters or take out the default
_T
ones for example.
4.1.5 FUNCTIONS TLSV

ER
This menu contains functions not related to Telealarm functionality

IN

RD
*4.1.5. FUNCTIONS T* 1 Reset OK This button generates an instant reset of the

Reset TLSV.. [1] Teleservicio2005 Node. As the CT looses communication
with the node due to that reset, messages on the CT like
'TIMEOUT ERROR' or blank menus are completely normal
GA
after this action.
4.2 RESCUE
Y_
Functions for the rescue service.

ON

TH
*4.2. RESCUE * 1 Alarm end started This button executes the end of alarm process of the
Gen. End of Alar[1] autodialler. This process is required by the EN81-28
standard and must be executed only by the rescue service
AN
once they've rescued the trapped passengers of the car.
4.3 PRODUCTION
Functions to be used in factory. Do not use them.

Device Autodialler

*4.3. PRODUCTION * 1 ORONA1 Permits selecting the client type that is going to use the
Client Ty[1] ORONAARCA Autodialler. When this parameter is changed, a subset of
parameters such as telephone numbers and phone line
12
Main Floor [2]
ORONA3 tones 'characteristics (that change from one country to
Garage Floor [3]
CloseDoors [4] CUS_SP another) are modified. The main target of this parameters
Up/Down [5] CUS_POR to facilitate the configuration of the autodialler.
12
Save Params.. [6] CUS_FRA
Play CD/UP/DOWN [7]
CUS_UK
Play Floor 0-15 [8]
20
Play Floor 16-31[9] CUS_BEL
Play 1 announce.[10] CUS_MAL
Last played (11) CUS_IRL
G_
CUS_HOL
CUS_AND
BALEAR
IN
GALO
PECRES
FT
ULAHI
ASBURGAS
MAR
ASGI
BAYFER
LI
COSECAN
AG
DIHER
ELEC_VIT
_T
ELEVABRA
OR_PORTU
SANCHEZ
ER
RESERV_1
RESERV_2
2 Range: 0..64 Sets the main floor. Changing this parameter, will also re-

IN
Default value: 0 configure the voice synthesizers messages configuration.
3 Range: 0..255 Variable related to voice synthesis configuration. Selects

which floor will be the upper garage floor stop. If this
RD
Default value: 255

variable is left at 255 then there are no garages, and all
stops below the ground floor are configured as 'first
basement', etc. Where this value is other than 255, all
GA
stops between Ground Floor and Garage Floor are

configured as 'first basement', etc.
4 Default value: SI Table to convert the LSB identifier into a composed

Y_
NO, SI message identifier.
5 NO, YES Enables/disables the 'lift going up' and 'lift going down'
messages.
ON
6 Params Saved This button fulfils actions over the parameters of the
node. It can save the parameters or take out the default
ones for example.
TH
7 Generates voice messages. For test purposes only.


AN


11 Shows witch has been the last voice synthesizers
message played.

Device Autodialler
4.6 FILES
Functions related to the management of the Smart Media
4.6.1 CURRENT VERSION INFO

Information about the currently loaded software on the Autodialler 2005.
12
12
*4.6.1. CURRENT VER* 1 Maximum: 12 characters Installed software version.

20
VersionSW (1)
FechaSW(2) 2 Maximum: 12 characters Software compilation date.
Ver.Au(3)
3 Shows the version of the audio file loaded in the
G_
Autodialler 2005
4.6.2 SMART MEDIA
IN
FT
the card.
LI
AG
*4.6.2.1. IDENTIFIC* 1 Name to identify the Smart Media.
Name (1)
_T

Num.Sectors (3)

ER
Bytes/page (5)
Free kB (7)


IN


RD
Usually it can reach 120 files per Smart Media card.


GA
4.6.2.2 FORMAT
Y_

ON

TH

Format [2]
AN

32 Mb.

Device Autodialler
4.6.2.3 EXPLORER
12
12
20
2
G_
Origin (7) 3
Destina(8)
IN
4 File creation date.
Version (9)
5
Flags (11)
FT
Note [12] 6 o File type.


8
LI Target device.

AG
corrupted.
_T

ER

IN

RD
GA

Y_
*4.6.2.3.3. TRANSFE* 1 Number of target node to which this file is oriented.

Node(1) IDFil(2)
File (3) 2 Exclusive identification number of file to download.
Transfer? [4]
ON


TH
4.6.2.3.4 VIEW FILE

AN

4.6.2.3.5 VERIFY
4.7 CLOCK

Device Autodialler

*4.7. CLOCK * 1 Part identifying the date.
Date [1]
Part identifying the time.
12
Time [2] 2
12
Permits changing the date and time data of the controller's clock. The autodialler has not its
own clock and it takes the time and date from the ARCAII controller. With other controllers the
autodialler starts the clock from 0 after a reset.
20
Display on screen is as described in the two following lines:
Date [ 3/10/96] : (Day/ Month / Year) shows the clock's date.
G_
Time [13: 4:10] : (Hours / Minutes / Seconds) shows the clock's time.
Date/Time changing procedure:
IN
Place the cursor in the desired field (Date or Time) and press the key.
FT
A flashing cursor moves in the field between []. Introduce the 6 digits using keys to
LI
. Enter the digits successively (the cursor moves to the next position once a digit has
been typed in).
Note1: If the figure in a field (hours, minutes, seconds, day, month, year) is less than 10,
AG

first introduce zero. E.g. two p.m. five minutes, three seconds would be written: 14/05/03.
Note2: January is month number '01', February '02' and so on.
_T
Note3: Year 2005 is noted '05', 2006 '06' and so on.

Once the six numbers have been written the cursors blink over the ']'symbol. To accept the
ER
introduced data click over , or click over to cancel the written data.
IN
5 PARAMETERS
Parameters of the lift alarm

RD
5.1 GENERALS
General parameters of the lift alarm
GA

Y_

*5.1. GENERALS * 1 Default value: 11 Time interval between two DTMF-s. DTMF-s received

ON
DTMFFilterValu[1] within a shorter time will not be detected. Meets the

Node direction[2] standard. Affects the detection of DTMF-s.
Client Typ[3] Default value: 1 Node direction, in relation to the CAN bus.
2
TH
MotherPara[4]
AN

Device Autodialler

Interface [5] 3 Default value: ORONA1 Permits selecting the client type that is going to use the
AV_INH Logic [6] ORONA1 Autodialler. When this parameter is changed, a subset of
AL_CAB Logic [7] parameters such as telephone numbers and phone line
ORONAARCA tones' characteristics (that change from one country to
AL_TEC_SUE Logi[8]
12
AL_AUX Logic [9] ORONA3 another) are modified. The main target of this parameter
GONG Logic [10] CUS_SP is to facilitate the configuration of the autodialler.
BOMB Logic [11] CUS_POR
12
CUS_FRA
CUS_UK
CUS_BEL
20
CUS_MAL
CUS_IRL
G_
CUS_HOL
CUS_AND
BALEAR
IN
GALO
PECRES
ULAHI
FT
ASBURGAS
MAR
ASGI
BAYFER
LI
COSECAN
AG
DIHER
ELEC_VIT
ELEVABRA
_T
OR_PORTU
SANCHEZ
ER
RESERV_1
RESERV_2
4 Default value: Status of mother parameters. Mother parameters are

IN
WOPARAM those that the ARCAII controller CPU dumps to the

OK Teleservice when it connects to the CAN network. This
means that a Teleservice2005 hardly needs configuring in
WOPARAM an ARCAII controller. This parameter can adopt the
RD
NEW_PARAM following values: OK: Teleservice has the controller

parameters. SINPARAM: The controller has not dumped
its parameters. NEWPARAM: This option should be chosen
GA
when some of the autodialler mother parameters have

been changed and you wish the controller to store a copy
of them. For example, if the controller has not been
configured with the installation code (one of the mother
Y_
parameters) at the factory, and this is entered into the

Teleservice manually via CT(Menu 5.4.1.) we would want
the controller to store it in case the Teleservice board is
ON
changed one day, so that the controller can dump it the

corrected parameter.
5 Default value: PARALLEL Selects the interface: CAN or parallel through which the

TH
CAN signal is valid (LSb, GONG,BOMB,AV_INH)

PARALLEL
6 Default value: OPEN Sets the logic of the corresponding input of the Autodialler

AN
OPEN, CLOSE 2005.
7 Default value: N_O Sets the logic of the corresponding input of the Autodialler
N_O, N_C 2005.
N_O, N_C 2005.

Device Autodialler

N_O, N_C 2005.

12
N_O, N_C 2005.
11 Default value: N_C Sets the logic of the corresponding input of the Autodialler
N_O, N_C 2005.
12
5.2 SYNTHESIS
Parameters related to the voice synthesizer
20
5.2.1 CONFIGURATION
Parameters related to the configuration of the lift alarm
G_
5.2.1.3 CONV LS-AUDIO
IN
Table that assigns the synthesizers announcement to the corresponding landing.
FT
*5.2.1.3. CONV LS-A* 1 Default value: 14 Table to convert the LSB identifier into a composed
Level
...
0 [1] LI
message identifier.
Level 31 []
AG
5.2.2 GENERALS
General parameters of the synthesis
_T

ER

*5.2.2. GENERALS * 1 Default value: SPANI This variable sets the main language used by the voice

IN
Main Language[1] SPANI synthesizer.

Secondary Lan[2]
ENGLI
Main Floor [3]
Garage Floor [4] FRENC
RD
En.Voice.Synt. [5] NONE

GONGMode [6] BASQUE
Num.Msgs.Lang1 (7)
GA
GALICI
Num.Msgs.Lang2 (8)
Available Lang. GERMAN
9-10 PORTUGUESE
Y_
ITALIAN
CATALAN
IRISH
ON
2 Idem This variable sets the second language to be used by the

voice synthesizer. If there isn't a second language
selected, the voice synthesizer will play messages only in
TH
the main language.

3 Range: 0..64 Sets the main floor. Changing this parameter, will also re-
Default value: 0 configure the voice synthesizers messages configuration.
AN
4 Range: 0..255 Variable related to voice synthesis configuration. Selects

Default value: 255 which floor will be the upper garage floor stop. If this
variable is left at 255 then there are no garages, and all
stops below the ground floor are configured as 'first
basement' ,etc. Where this value is other than 255, all
stops between Ground Floor and Garage Floor are
configured as 'first basement', etc.

Device Autodialler

5 Default value: NO Activates / Deactivates voice synthesizers messages (both
NO, YES languages).
6 Default value: Permits fixing the gong type: sound, voice message

12
WOUT_GONG (up/down) or no gong.
WOUT_GONG
ONLYGONG
12
GONG_MSG
7 Number of voice synthesis messages in language 1.

20
8 Number of voice synthesis messages in language 2.

9 SPANI One of the available voice synthesizer's languages.

G_
ENGLI
FRENC
NONE
IN
BASQUE
GALICI
GERMAN
FT
PORTUGUESE
ITALIAN
CATALAN
IRISH
LI
10 Idem One of the available voice synthesizer's languages.

AG
General parameters of the synthesis

_T
5.3 MACH.ROOM PHONE

Parameters related to the machine room phone and porter's lodge phone
ER
5.3.1 GENERALS
IN
General parameters of the machine room phone and porter's lodge phone
RD

*5.3.1. GENERALS * 1 Default value: NO Parameter which enables a call to intercom (porter's
GA
En.MR phone [1] NO, YES lodge) before calling the Call Centre. Enabling this
MR Phone Time[2] function contravenes the terms of regulation EN81-
En.Fireman phone[3] 28,which stipulates that the call must be made to a rescue
Y_
centre.
2 Default value: 3000 Duration of conversation through intercom.

ON
3 Default value: NO This variable enables or disables the fireman mode. This
NO, YES mode affects the behaviour of the intercom with both
machine room, fireman floor and porter's lodge when the
lift is in fireman mode. These intercoms will be enabled
TH
while the lift is in fireman mode.
5.4 LIFT ALARM

AN
Parameters related to the lift alarm's state

5.4.1 CONFIGURATION
Parameters related to the lift alarm's configuration

Device Autodialler

*5.4.1. CONFIGURATI* 1 Maximum: 12 characters Password to program the Autodialler. It's used in the
Password [1] Default value: "123456" incoming calls to access the Autodialler
12
Ins.Cod. [2]
2 Maximum: 12 characters Lift installation code. Its value must be already set by the
Country [3] Default value: CPU (ARCAII controllers only) or will have to be set up by
Alarm filtering [4]
"000000000" the Call Centre (rest of the controllers)
Min time cabi[5]
12
Act.siren [6] 3 SPAIN Country in which the Autodialler is.
Num.rings unhoo[7] PORTUGAL
TimeOutg.Call[8]
FRANCE
20
TimeInco.Call[9]
Autonom.alarm [10] MOROCCO
Time.Tel.Msg [11] UK
G_
T.Act.Al.Auto[12] BELGIUM
En. ciclic test [13]
MALTA
En. line test [14]
Group Id [15] IRELAND
IN
Lift Al.w.voice [16] NETHERLANDS
DTMFProto[17] ANDORRA
InterDTMFPause[18]m
CAPTURE
FT
MaxNumCallTries [19]
En.Adv.PickUp [20] 4 Default value: YES Enables the filtering of an alarm signal, both from the
MaxTonesRingB [21]
NO, YES digital input and from the CAN input.
MaxTimeRingB [22]d
MinTimeUnderAla[23]
WaitTimeNoLine[24]s
5 Default value: 63 LI Time the input must be on for the alarm to be considered
as activated. This applies when filtering is taken into
account (present situation).
AG
6 Default value: ALWAYS ALWAYS: The buzzer always sounds when the alarm
ALWAYS, FILTER, pushbutton is pressed.
NEVER FILTER: The buzzer sounds as a function of the alarm
inhibit filter.
_T
NEVER: The buzzer never sounds.

7 Default value: 2 Number of RING-s to be detected before picking up.

ER
8 Default value: 12000 Maximum time of an emission call (made by TS).

9 Default value: 12000 Maximum time of an incoming call (received by TS).
IN

10 Default value: NO Enables autonomous Autodialler (for cases of TLSV
NO, YES without controller).
RD
11 Default value: 300 Vandal-call filter time.

12 Default value: 100 Waiting time so that user can press the alarm car

GA
pushbutton again in autonomous Autodiallers.

13 Default value: NO Enables the voice test. The test must be performed well
NO, YES once. After making the test, this parameter is
Y_
automatically disabled.
14 Default value: NO Enables the phone line test. Permits assessing the
NO, YES telephone line quality and thus the quality of
ON
communications between Autodialler and CC.

15 Default value: 50 Id of TS when a group of TS-s shares the same telephone
line.
TH
16 Default value: YES Enables Autodialler's voice messages. If this parameter is

NO, YES disabled, no synthesis messages will be played while the
autodialler is in autodialler mode.
AN

Device Autodialler

17 Default value: TLSV2000 Selects the type of protocol to be used for communication
TLSV2000 with the Call Centre. Changing this parameter involves
modifying when the car microphone will turn on, as each
EN8128_ORONA protocol switches it on at a different time. With protocols
12
ONE_DTMF UN_DTMF and SIN_PROTOCOLO, an operator should
NO_PROTOCOL enter a DTMF so that the equipment can detect when
someone has picked up the phone at the other end of the
STAIRS
line.
12
EN8128_PUB
OTHER1
OTHER2
20
OTHER3
18 Units: [min] This variable sets the time gap between two DTMFs.

G_
Default value: 88
19 Default value: 15 Maximum amount of phone call tries that can do the
Autodialler 2005. Its valid for all the call types (alarm,
IN
voice test, cyclic calls...)
20 Default value: YES Not to be used. For R&D purposes.
NO, YES
FT
21 Default value: 8 This variable sets the value of the number of Ring back
(or Calling) tones that will be detected before deciding
there's no answer from the Call Centre.
22 Units: [s/10]
Default value: 500
LI This variable sets the time that the Autodialler will wait
before deciding there's no answer from the Call Centre.
23 Default value: 63 Sets the minimum pressing time required in the Top or
AG
Floor alarm pushbuttons to launch an alarm call.
24 Units: [s] Sets the time to call again when there is no line The
Default value: 300 minimum value is 60 seconds and the maximum value is
_T
300 seconds
5.4.2 TELEPHONES
ER
Phone numbers dialled in each Lift Alarm calling mode alarm, end of alarm, automatic test,
voice test and battery error
IN

RD

*5.4.2. TELEPHONES * 1 Maximum: 12 characters Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases
AL1 [1] are as follows: alarm, end of alarm, cycle test, voice test.
GA
AL2 [] If not number is to be dialled (as is the case with call

AL3 [] centres with 'Hot Dial' functionality, the number can be
... deleted using the 'Borrar' key and pressing 'Validar'. In
AL5 [] such cases the Autodialler will connect a telephone line
Y_
EndAL[2] but not dial any number and will wait for the interlocutor
... to pick up the phone.
EndAL[] 2 Maximum: 12 characters Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases
ON
CiclT[3] are as follows: alarm, end of alarm, cycle test, voice test.
... If not number is to be dialled (as is the case with call
CiclT[] centres with 'Hot Dial' functionality, the number can be
deleted using the 'Borrar' key and pressing 'Validar'. In
TH
Voice[4]
... such cases the Autodialler will connect a telephone line
Voice[] but not dial any number and will wait for the interlocutor
BatKO[5] to pick up the phone.
AN
... 3 Maximum: 12 characters Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases

BatKO[] are as follows: alarm, end of alarm, cycle test, voice test.
If not number is to be dialled (as is the case with call
centres with 'Hot Dial' functionality, the number can be
such cases the Autodialler will connect a telephone line
but not dial any number and will wait for the interlocutor
to pick up the phone.

Device Autodialler

4 Maximum: 12 characters Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases
are as follows: alarm, end of alarm, cycle test, voice test.
12
12
20
G_
5.4.4 INTERFACE
IN
Line interface type selection: PSTN or GSM
FT
*5.4.4. INTERFACE *
Interface [1]
1 Default value: PSTN
PSTN, GSM
LI Indicates the telephone interface available or to be used:
RTC or GSM.
AG
5.4.5 DTMF PROTOCOLS
Parameters related to the behaviour of the available DTMF protocols
_T
5.4.5.1 EN81-28 ORONA

Parameters related to the behaviour of the EN81-28 ORONA DTMF protocol
ER

IN

*5.4.5.1. EN81-28 O* 1 Default value: NO This parameter enables additional data sending in the
En.DataSending [1] EN81_28_XX DTMF protocols. This parameter needs to be
RD
NO, YES
Period.Test Mute[2] enabled to inform the Call Centre about the battery
Shared line [3] events, as required in the EN81-28.
PickUp by Inv. [4] 2 Default value: YES Enables/Disables the silent Ciclic Test. This parameter
GA
NextCiclTest (5) NO, YES only works with the EN81_28_XX DTMF protocols.
3 Default value: NO This parameter must be enabled when the Autodialler

2005 is installed in a shared phone line. It changes the
Y_
NO, YES
behaviour of the EN81_28_XX protocols as far as it
silences the answers of the autodialler in some steps of
the DTMF communication.
ON
4 Default value: NO This parameter, enables the detection of the interlocutor's

NO, YES presence detecting de line's polarity change.
5 Shows the number of minutes remaining for the next

TH
periodic test call.
5.4.5.2 EN81-28 PUBLIC

AN
Parameters related to the behaviour of the EN81-28 PUBLIC DTMF protocol

5.4.5.3 TLSV2000
Parameters related to the behaviour of the TLSV2000 protocol

Device Autodialler

*5.4.5.3. TLSV2000 * 1 Default value: NO This parameter enables the opening of the microphone
Prev.Mic Opening[1] NO, YES after the phone call dialling in TLSV2000(ARCA),
ONE_DTMF and NO_PROTOCOL DTMF protocols.
12
5.4.5.4 NO PROTOCOL
12
Parameters related to the behaviour of the NO PROTOCOL DTMF protocol
5.4.5.5 ONE DTMF
20
Parameters related to the behaviour of the ONE DTMF protocol
5.4.6 SWITCHBOARD
G_
5.4.6.1 GENERALS
IN
FT
*5.4.6.1. GENERALS *
No Tone Call [1]
TWait No Tone [2]
1 Default value: NO
NO, YES
LI Permits making a phone call with an autodialler without
need for a telephone line to be detected first.
2 Default value: 30 Time waited by the autodialler before dialling when

Line Inv. Detect[3]
AG
installed in lines that haven't an dialling tone.
ExtPreDial [5]
MinTimeDTMF [6] 3 Default value: NO Enables/Disables the detection of the phone line polarity
NO, YES inversion.
_T
5 Maximum: 28 characters Previous Dial that will be made to reach an external phone
Default value: "" line. Once dialled this number, the numbers in the menu
5.4.2. will be dialled. Very useful in lines connected to a
ER
PBX.
6 Default value: 4

IN
5.4.6.2 CALL PROGRESS

RD

GA

*5.4.6.2. CALL PROG* 1 This variable shows which is the Call Progress tone shown
Tone[1]Type[2] in the CT screen, from the different available.
Y_
ON1[3]OFF1 [4] Default value: LINE Array of Call Progress tones characteristics.. CallProgress
ON2[5]OFF2 [6]
2 NULL tone type..
ON3[7]OFF3 [8]
ON
Tol[9]Capt[10] BUSY
MaxTimeON (11) CALLING
MaxTimeOFF (12) LINE
TH
NO_LINE
CALL
CONGESTION
AN
RING
3 Default value: 1600 Array of Call Progress tones characteristics.. Cadences of
the Call Progress tone..

Device Autodialler

12
Default value: 0 Array of Call Progress tones characteristics.. Cadences of
12
8 the Call Progress tone..
9 Default value: 10 Array of Call Progress tones characteristics.. Margin in the
measure of the detection of the tone. in %.
20
10 START This variable starts the Call Progress cadence capture.
WAIT
G_
DISABLED
11 Time of the longest ON of the table. Useful to check the
integrity of the table..
IN
12 Time of the longest OFF of the table. Useful to check the
integrity of the table..
5.4.6.3 INCOMING CALLS
FT
LI
AG
*5.4.6.3. INCOMING * 1 Default value: NO Enables the simple ring detection.
DetectRingSimple[1] NO, YES
MinPulsesSimpl[2]
_T
2 Default value: 20 This parameter enables the Simple detection of the ring.
RingPeriod [3]m
TimeMinONRing[4]m
3 Units: [min] Period of the RING signal in the phone line.
ONRingMinPulses(5)
ER
ONsInARING [6] Default value: 40

Ring Det.Table C[7] 4 Units: [min] Minimum time needed to receive a ring. Used in the
Default value: 1200 conventional ring detection.
IN
5 This parameter shows the amount of oscillations of the

ring signal needed to consider that a ring is present.
6 Default value: 1 Variable calculated from the minimum time that a ring
RD
should be present and the period of the ring signal.

7 Default value: YES This variable will activate the Ring signal detection
NO, YES through a comparison with the Call Progress Table.
GA
5.4.7 CONFIGURATION 2
Extra parameters related to the lift alarm's configuration
Y_

ON

*5.4.7. CONFIGURATI* 1 Default value: 15

TH
MaxNumAlarmCall [1]
MaxNumEndALCall [2] 2 Default value: 15
MaxNumCiclTCall [3]
AN
MaxNumVoiceTCall[4] 3 Default value: 15

Op.Mode[5]

4 Default value: 15


Device Autodialler

5 Default value:
EN8128std
EN8128std
12
EN8128basic
Reserved
5.5 AUDIO
12
Audio volume settings
20
G_
*5.5. AUDIO * 1 Default value: 4 Permits the setting of the car audio amplifier's volume
Cabina_Vol [1] value. Changing this value affects the volume of the rest
MR_Phone_Vol [2] acoustic functions (Intercom, Hands-off (autodialler),
IN
DSynthesis_Vol [3] Gong and Voice synthesizer).
NSynthesis_Vol [4] 2 Default value: 3 Permits the setting of the intercom volume value.
Phone_PSTN_Vol [5]
FT
DTMF Level [6] 3 Default value: 40 Voice synthesis daytime volume value. To be modified
according to requirements between 0 and 240. Day/night
time zones are programmed in controller menu 5.6.2 or
5.6.A.
4 Default value: 15
LI Voice synthesis night time volume value. To be modified
according to requirements between 0 and 240. Day/night
time zones are programmed in controller menu 5.6.2 or
AG
5.6.A.
5 Default value: 1 Telephone line volume value. It may be necessary to
adjust this value depending on telephone line installation
_T
quality. Adjust between 80 and 200.

6 Default value: 150 Permits the setting of the volume of the DTMF tone
generator.
ER
5.6 SUPPLY AND BATTERY

IN
Parameters to adjust the monitoring of the main power supply and battery management
RD

GA
*5.6. SUPPLY AND BA* 1 Default value: 24 Time interval between battery status monitoring.
T_Bet_BatMon [1]
T_Bet_Samples [2] 2 Default value: 60 Time between battery voltage sample measurements
T_BatMon [3] during status monitoring.
Y_
Num_Sam_PaDato_B[4] 3 Default value: 88 Duration of long-duration monitoring of battery status .

Long_Bat_Mon [5]
Short_Bat_Mon [6] 4 Default value: 2 Number of samples necessary to get a valid datum of

ON
T_Bet_Short_BatM[7] battery voltage.

T_Watch_Bat_Volt[8] Default value: 22 Enables/disables long-duration monitoring of battery
T_Watch_Main_Vol[9] 5 status (default is 1 hour).
TH
6 Default value: 20 Enables/disables short-duration monitoring of battery

status (default is 5 minutes).
7 Default value: 113 Duration of short-duration monitoring of battery status.

AN
8 Default value: 0 Battery voltage monitoring time.

9 Default value: 0 Main power supply voltage monitoring time.

5.7 MONITORIZATION
Parameters for the monitoring of the auxiliary power supply
Device Autodialler

*5.7. MONITORIZATIO* 1 Default value: YES This parameter enables the surveillance of the battery
BatSurveillance [1] NO, YES existence (or not). This parameter is independent from
the one that enables the battery monitoring.
12
24VSurveillance [2]
BatMonitoriza [3] Default value: YES This parameter enables the surveillance of the main
2
V.woBat(mV) [4] power supply existence (or not).
NO, YES
V.Bat1H(mV) [5]
12
Perio.MonBat[6]m 3 Default value: YES This parameter enables the monitoring of the battery. This
NextMon (7)m
NO, YES monitoring will tell if the battery is aged or not.
T.Disc.Mon [8]s Default value: 2000 This parameter, in kilovolts, fixes the limit of the battery
4
20
Period BatSur[9]s existence or not. It is strongly recommended to ask your
MonAutoCall [10] after sales contact before changing this value, as far as it
BatStatus (11) can generate false battery disconnection calls to the Call
G_
BatStatusG(12) Centre.
TelephoneBatKO [13] Default value: 5900 This parameter, in milepost, fixes the limit of the battery
5 ageing during the battery monitoring. It is strongly
recommended to ask your after sales contact before
IN
changing this value, as far as it can generate false battery
ageing calls to the Call Centre.
6 Units: [min] Shows the period of the battery monitoring. It should
FT
Default value: 1440 always be more than 1200 min (battery's standard full
charging time), to prevent fake calls to the call centre due
to charging periods of the battery after deep discharges.
7 Units: [min]
Units: [s]
LI
Time left, in minutes for the next battery monitoring.
Battery discharging time in the monitoring.

8
AG
Default value: 576
9 Units: [s] Period of the battery and main supply surveillance and
Default value: 300 monitoring task.
_T
10 Default value: NO Enables an automatic call to the call centre when the
NO, YES autodialler finds a fault in the battery. This automatic call
is only generated in the EN81_28_XX DMTF protocols.
ER
11 LESS_1_H Shows the battery status, as a result of the battery

BAT_OK monitoring.
NO_BAT
IN
12 BAT_OK, BAT_KO

RD
NO, YES
GA
7 SETUP
Y_
Menu for the Setup process options.

ON

TH
*7. SETUP * 1 Default value: NO Shows if the Autodialler 2005 is installed in a lift under
EnabSETUP [1] NO, YES assembly. Limits some of his features.
AN
8 CALL CENTRE
Menu for the Call Centre configuration: protocol y telephone numbers

Device Autodialler

*8. CALL CENTRE * 1 Default value: SIMPLE Selects the type of protocol to be used for communication
ProtoDTMF[1] SIMPLE with the Call Centre. Changing this parameter involves
modifying when the car microphone will turn on, as each
12
AL1 [2]
ORONA protocol switches it on at a different time. With protocols
AL2 []
AL3 [] TELEFONO UN_DTMF and SIN_PROTOCOLO, an operator should
... enter a DTMF so that the equipment can detect when
12
AL5 [] someone has picked up the phone at the other end of the
EndAL[3] line.
... 2 Maximum: 12 characters Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases

20
EndAL[] are as follows: alarm, end of alarm, cycle test, voice test.
CiclT[4] If not number is to be dialled (as is the case with call
... centres with 'Hot Dial' functionality, the number can be
G_
CiclT[]
Voice[5] such cases the Autodialler will connect a telephone line
... but not dial any number and will wait for the interlocutor
Voice[] to pick up the phone.
IN
BatKO[6] 3 Maximum: 12 characters Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases
...
BatKO[] If not number is to be dialled (as is the case with call
FT
4
LI
Maximum: 12 characters
Telephone numbers to be called in each situation. Cases
AG
_T
ER

IN

RD

GA

Y_
ON
7.2. Description of the faults of the device Autodialler

TH
Description of the faults of the device Autodialler

100 FA_NO_BATTERY The Autodialler can't detect a connected battery. Verify that the battery is connected to the
AN
board. If it is, replace the battery

101 FA_BAT_CAP_LESS_1_HOUR The Autodialler has detected a remaining charge Verify that the battery has been connected
in the battery insufficient to provide a 1 hour to the autodialler at least for 24 hours (24
autonomy. hours charging). If it has, replace the
battery by a new one (battery aged)

Device Autodialler

102 FA_NO_PHONE_LINE The autodialler can't detect a telephone line. The autodialler has no phone line:
Verify that there is a line voltage in the Car
Distribution Board (JC11 in PDCM for ARCA
controllers and J15 in ARCA BSICO, M322,
12
M33 and all the ARCAII installations)
103 FA_NO_ARCAII_CONTROLLE The autodialler has been configured to work Verify the parameter Interface in the menu
R with an ARCAII controller, but it can't find it. 5.1. of the autodialler. This parameter
12
should have a [CAN] value only in ARCAII
controllers and [PARAL] in the rest.
Verify that you can access the menus of the
20
autodialler with the Maintenance Tool to
check that the CAN is not damaged.
After having checked all this after the reset
G_
of the Autodialler, verify the quality of the
CAN coms (there is a dedicated menu in the
controller) and the presence of the rest of
the nodes of the CAN networking a very
IN
noisy environment for the CAN, this fault
could also happen. In this case, verify the
start and end of the fault
FT
In installations with a very noisy CAN, brief
losses of the connection with Controller
could happen(verify the init and end of
fault).
104 FA_NO_24V_MAIN_SUPPLY
LI
The 24V main power supply has failed Verify the main power supply switches,
wirings and fuses.
AG
105 FA_CAR_ALARM_PUSHBUTT A too long car alarm button pressing has been The pushbutton is pressed or there is a
ON_STICKED detected derivation in one of the alarm pushbutton's
wirings.
Verify the pushbutton and the wirings (J2,
_T
J3, J9).
106 FA_UNDER_OVERCABIN_AL Same as The pushbutton is pressed or there is a
ARM_PUSHBUTTON_STICKE FA_CAR_ALARM_PUSHBUTTON_STICKED, but derivation in one of the alarm pushbutton's
ER
D with the Over cabin pushbutton wirings.

Verify PUL1 pushbutton of the board and J7
connector.
IN
107 FA_UNCORRECT_LANGUAGE Language 1 is incorrectly parameterized There has been an audio updating but first
_1 language parameter hasn't been changed
The board comes from the factory with a
RD
language different from the Spanish-English,

and it hasn't been parameterized yet.
108 FA_UNCORRECT_LANGUAGE Language 2 is incorrectly parameterized There has been an audio updating but
GA
_2 second language parameter hasn't been

changed
Board has been configured on factory for
Y_
another language different to Spanish or

English and it has not been reconfigured yet.
109 AV_GSM_BAT_MENOR_A_1 The Teleservice has detected insufficient Check the GSM link.
ON
HORA capacity in the GSM battery supply to guarantee

its operation for an hour.
200 AN_SYNTHESIZER Audio synthesizer error The file loaded in the board has been
TH
incorrectly generated. Please contact the

after sales service.
201 AN_SYNTHESIZER_MAILBOX The autodialler has been asked to reproduce Please contact the after sales service.
_FULL more messages that it can reproduce (memory
AN
overload)

Device Autodialler

202 AN_COMS_DTMF_ARCAII There has been an anomaly in the comms with It could be a User Termination Point very far
the call centre. from the PSTN's switchboard.
Verify that the filter DTMF has a correct
configuration value (Menu 5.1.).
12
If the autodialler has been mounted in a line
provided by a GSM Track, the covertures
must be EXCELLLENT ALWAYS
12
203 AN_INI_CAN There has been an error initializing the CAN. Verify the CAN network and its wirings
204 AN_INTERFACE_TYPE The autodialler has been configured to work Bad parametrization. The autodialler will
with its own GSM interface (not available yet). change the parameters, but it won't save
20
them.
205 AN_NON_ALLOWED_DTMF A non valid DTMF has been tried to generate Bad Parametrization of the installation code
or the alarm phone numbers. Verify that the
G_
installation code has numerical digits and the
phone numbers use characters between 0 -
9 , # and B (these last two to introduce in
IN
the phone dialling).
206 AN_COM_DTMF_ARCA There has been an anomaly in the comms with It could be a User Termination Point very far
the call centre. from the PSTN's switchboard.
FT
Verify that the filter DTMF has a correct
configuration value (Menu 5.1.).
If the autodialler has been mounted in a line
provided by a GSM Track, the covertures
LI must be EXCELLLENT ALWAYS
In case of errors does not make possible a
bidirectional communication with car, call to
AG
after sales service.
207 AN_MAX_DTMF_STRING_CH The DTMF string to be reproduced is too long. Cal the after sales service in order to inform
ARACTERS about the anomaly.
_T
208 AN_UNKNOWN_CAN_MESSA The autodialler has received an unknown The autodialler's software version can be
GE_FROM_CONTROLLER message from the controller. obsolete respect to the controller's. Please
update the autodialler's firmware
ER
209 AN_UNKNOWN_CAN_MESSA The controller can't interpreter the CAN message Controller's firmware obsolete version.
GE_TO_CONTROLLER sent to it. Update Controller's firmware
Verify Controller's software version and
IN
update it if you consider it can be outdated

respect to Device autodialler's version.
210 AN_MAX_DTMF_ARRAYS The autodialler has too many DTMFs to play. Please contact the after sale service.
RD
211 AN_INI_SYNTHESIZER Corrupted audio file. The audio file's info is not correct. Please
contact the after sales service in order to
solve the problem.
GA
212 AN_CALL_NOT_ATTENDED The autodialler has made its max number of No phone line.
consecutive calls with no success. There is a line connected, but the LINE CP
tones are incorrectly configured. Please
Y_
configure them properly.

Although Autodialler has phone line, in case
of private switchboard it is not able to have
ON
a external connection.
Call Centre is damaged.
300 EV_CP_CONGES The autodialler has detected congestion tones in The autodialler has detected tones in the
TH
the phone line phone line with the set cadences.

301 EV_CP_BUSY The autodialler has detected busy tones in the The autodialler has detected tones in the
phone line phone line with the set cadences.
AN
302 EV_CP_LINE There is a tone in the line to start dialling the The autodialler has detected tones in the
phone number phone line with the set cadences.
303 EV_CP_CALLING The autodialler has detected calling (ring back) The autodialler has detected tones in the
tones in the phone line phone line with the set cadences.
304 EV_CP_RING There is an incoming call. A RING signal has been detected in the line.

Device Autodialler

305 EV_CALL_NOT_ATTENDED There hasn't been an answer from the called It can happen in some calls that aren't made
phone number. to a Call Centre or a Call Centre that is not
operative 24h a day.
306 EV_CALL_RECEIVED The autodialler has received an incoming call For all the DTMF protocols:
12
The autodialler has received an incoming call
(to talk with the trapped passengers).
The autodialler has received a programming
12
Call.
Besides, for EN81_28 protocols:
The autodialler has received a line test call.
20
307 EV_CALL_MADE The autodialler has made a call to the Call For all the DTMF protocols:
Centre. The autodialler has made an alarm call.
G_
Besides, for the EN81-28 protocol:
The autodialler has made an end of alarm
call.
IN
The autodialler has made a ciclic test call.
The autodialler has made a voice test call.
308 EV_MR_PHONE The Machine room phone has been hung down. The porter's lodge, or the machine rooms
FT
phone have been hung down.
309 EV_VOICETEST_CONTR The controller has asked to start the voice test. The controller has started the voice test
mode in the autodialler.
310 EV_FIREMEN LI
A firemen communication has started The Firemen input has been activated and
the machine room or fireman floor's phone
has been hung down.
AG
311 EV_VALID_ALARM There has been a valid alarm pushbutton's There has been an alarm pushbutton
pressing pressing when the filter was deactivated.
312 EV_PHONE_DIALLING A phone number has been dialled. The number of the call centre has been
_T
dialled.
313 EV_DTMF_COMS_START The Call Centre has started the communications. The autodialler has received the command
form the Call Centre to start the
ER
communications.
314 EV_CC_DATA_SEND_OK Data interchange with the Call Centre has The autodialler has finished the data sending
finished. to the Call Centre.
IN
315 EV_CAR_MIC_OPENED A bidirectional communication has been The autodialler has negotiated correctly the
established with the Call Centre's agent. car mic's opening.
316 EV_END_CC The autodialler has received the command to The autodialler has received the command
RD
hung up the line. to hung up the line.

317 EV_CP_BAT_GSM The GSM battery error has been detected. The The autodialler has detected the GSM
data has been sent to the Call Centre battery error tone.
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

Device Autodialler
8. Device LCD
Node of monochrome indicator (LCD)
12
8.1. Table of menus of LCD
12
MONOCHROME LCD MENU
2 PARAMETERS
20
LCD PARAMETERIZATION LCD
G_
IN
*2. PARAMETERS * 1 Range: 0..255 Sonorous level of call registered
VolumeCR [1] Vol max = 0
FT
TimeCR [2]
Vol min = 255.
Format dat[3]
Lighting [4] 2 Range: 0..255 Length of time of call registers. Tenth of seconds.
Contraste [5]
Temperatuere Type[6]
Offset Temp. [7]
3 ddmmyyyy
yyyymmdd
LIDate Format
dd/mm/yyyy: Day/Month/Year
Overload Type [8] mmddyyyy yyyy/mm/dd: Year/Month/Day
AG
Display Ty[9] NULL mm/dd/yyyy: Month/Day/Year
Checksum (10)
NULL: Without Date.
_T
4 Range: 0..100 Lighting level 0-100%.
5 Range: 0..100 Contrast Level 0-100%.

ER
6 C, F Temperature Type
C:Celsius
F:Faranheit.
IN
7 Temperature Offset(C).
8 ORO, N_O Type of load Weigh

RD
ORO:ORONA
N_O:No ORONA.
HIT_CCFL Type of Display
GA
9
HIT_LED HIT_CCFL:With Fluorescent lamp Backlight
HIT_LED:With LED Backlight.
Y_
10 TRADUCIR-REVISAR

ON
3 FUNCTIONS
LCD FUNCTIONS
TH

AN

*3. FUNCTIONS * 1 NO, YES Reset Node
Reset Node [1]
Rec.Parameters [2] 2 NO, YES Save parameters

Device LCD
4 PERSONALIZE
Change Text a Position Signal

4.1 SMART MEDIA
12
12
the card.
20
G_
Name (1)

IN
Num.Sectors (3)
Bytes/page (5)


FT
Free kB (7)
6
LI [sectors/page] x [bytes/sector]
Number of physical inputs that can be considered as files.
AG

4.1.2 FORMAT
_T
ER

IN
RD
Format [2]

GA

32 Mb.
Y_
4.1.3 EXPLORER
ON
4.1.3.1 INFORMATION
TH

AN

*4.1.3.1. INFORMATI* 1 Exclusive identication number of file on Smart Media's file
2

Device LCD

Type (6) 3 Accurate size of file in bytes.
Origin (7)
Destina(8) 4 File creation date.
Version (9)
12
CRC (10) 5 File creation time.
Flags (11)


12

8 Target device.

20
G_
corrupted.

IN
FT
4.1.3.2 DELETE FILE
4.1.3.3 TRANSFER FILE LI
AG
_T

*4.1.3.3. TRANSFER * 1
Node(1)IDFic:(2)
ER
File (3) 2
Boot? [4]
3
IN
4
RD
4.1.3.4 VIEW FILE

GA
4.1.3.5 VERIFY
Y_
4.1.3.6 REPAIR
ON
TH
AN

Device LCD
9. Device Door
Door management node
12
9.1. Table of menus of Door
12
1 FAULTS
20
1.2 ALARMS
G_
IN
1.2.1 PRESENT
Faults detected
FT
*1.2.1. PRESENT *
No.
1
Mark
Ok, Error
LI
Error in the drive1.
Conver.Frec (1)
AG
Lock Open (2) 2 Ok, Error The door has been blocked trying open it.
Lock Close (3)
Friction (4) 3 Ok, Error The door has been blocked trying close it.

_T
Temperature (5)
Autotune (6) 4 Ok, Error There was an excessive friction.
Encoder (7)

Ok, Error The drive has been running at excessive temperature.
ER
5
6 Ok, Error Auto-tuning of the doors does not work.

IN
7 Ok, Error The encoder is faulty.

RD
1.2.2 LAST FAULT

Last fault detected in controlled parts of the motor and the drive
GA

Y_

ON
TH
AN

Device Door

*1.2.2. LAST FAULT * 1 Ok: No errors, Code for last error alarm generated
Last fault everything is correct
(1) Conver Frec:
Frequency conversion
12
error
Lock Open: Door
locked when attempting
12
to open it
Lock Close: Door
locked when attempting
20
to close it
Friction: Excessive
friction has occurred
G_
Temperature:
Temperature has risen
excessively at some
point during operation
IN
Autotune: Door auto
tuning does not work
Encoder
FT
Encoder:
broken
AntiMorosos: Timer
that locks the door in
to 0
LI
the absence of payment.
Set after
supervision routine
AG

_T
2 HISTORIC
2.1 GENERAL
ER

IN

*2.1. GENERAL * 1 Number of hours operation

RD
Hours Nr. (1)

Total cycl(2) 2 Indicates total number of equipment cycles
Autotunes (3)
Number of auto-adjustments carried out on the unit
GA
3
Y_
3 VARIABLES
ON
3.3 MEASURES
TH

AN

*3.3. MEASURES * 1 Corresponds to equipment rectified supply voltage, and
Power Supply. (1) indicates if external fuse has blown.
Motor Currrent (2) The value indicated corresponds to the motor output
2
Real Temperatur(3) current. This value is expressed in tenths of an Ampere

Device Door

Friction (4) 3 Indicates temperature during VVF power stage. 5C
Door Position (5) resolution
4 Friction value detected in system during auto-adjustment.
Relationship between speed imposed on motor and actual
12
speed when performing auto-adjustment
5 Real time encoder value for door position in centimetres
from door closed position.
12
3.4 DOOR STATUS
20
G_
IN
*3.4. DOOR STATUS * 1 Marca Indicates current door position
Positi(1) Paso
Status(2)
Paro cerr.
FT
Freno cerr
Paro abrir
Freno abre
Mov patin
Ini cerrar
LI
AG
2 Waiting Indicates current door status
Open
Pause
_T
Close
Reopening
Stop
ER
Lock Alarm

IN
3.5 I/O DEVICE

RD

GA

*3.5. I/O DEVICE * 1 OFF, ON Drive inputs
IR IRM LCP LAP
Y_
(1) () () () 2 OFF, ON Controller orders

BCP BAP BCF

(2) () ()
ON
4 FUNCTIONS
TH
4.2 OPTIONS
AN

*4.2. OPTIONS * 1 Default value: One This option should be active for systems with 2 motors
Motors Nr. [1] One, Two and emergency circuit (different voltages if 1 or 2 motors)

Device Door

Compact Door [2] 2 Default value: NO Compact door
Parking Mode [3] NO, YES
3 Default value: YES Locking or parking mode

12
NO, YES
4.3 SMART MEDIA
12
20
the card.
G_
IN
Name (1)
FT
Num.Sectors (3)
Bytes/page (5)

Num.Inputs
Free kB
(6)
(7)
4 LI
Pages per sector of the Smart Media that is being used.
Number of bytes per page of the Smart Media. The total

5
AG

_T


ER
4.3.2 FORMAT
IN

RD

GA

Format [2]
Y_

ON
32 Mb.
4.3.3 EXPLORER
TH

4.3.3.1 INFORMATION
AN


Device Door

*4.3.3.1. INFORMATI* 1 Exclusive identication number of file on Smart Media's file
2
12
3
12
Origin (7)
Version (9)
4
CRC (10)
20
5 File creation time.
Flags (11)

G_

8 Target device.

IN
Cyclic Redundancy Check to check the file is not
FT
10 corrupted.
12
LI Comment about file.
AG
4.3.3.2 DELETE FILE
_T
4.3.3.3 TRANSFER FILE

ER

IN

*4.3.3.3. TRANSFER * 1
Node(1) IDFic(2)
RD
File (3) 2
Transfer? [4]
3
GA
4
4.3.3.4 VIEW FILE
Y_

ON
4.3.3.5 VERIFY
TH
4.3.4 REPAIR
AN
5 PARAMETERS
Sets general parameters of all types: electrical, mechanical,...

Device Door
5.1 SET-UP
General parameters of the doors
12
*5.1. SET-UP * 1 Default value: No Indicates level of protection of modified parameters.

12
Protection [1] No: Only energy After modifying the parameters there is the possibility of
parameters are recording the modifications made. Attention! Save free
protected: VOLTAGE 0, pass
V/F OPEN and V/F
20
CLOSE, after an auto
adjustment
Partial: Only energy
G_
parameters are
protected: VOLTAGE 0,
V/F OPEN and V/F
IN
CLOSE, after an auto
adjustment
Full: Permanently
record all programming
FT
parameters
5.3 MECHANICS LI
List of parameters that define the physical geometry of the doors
AG
_T
*5.3. MECHANICS * 1 Range: 1..40 Acceleration on open. (mm/s)

Acel.Open [1] Default value: 10
ER
Decel.Open [2]
2 Range: 1..40 Deceleration on open. (mm/s)
Acel.Close [3] Default value: 8
Decel.Close [4]
Spa.End Open. [10] 3 Range: 1..40 Acceleration on close. (mm/s)
IN
Spa.Ini Close [11] Default value: 10

Long.PFT aux. [12]
4 Range: 1..40 Deceleration on close. (mm/s)
Long.PFO aux. [13]
RD
Default value: 4
10 Range: 0..30 Final low speed space to finish open (cm)
Default value: 2
GA
11 Range: 0..30 Final low speed space to finish close (cm)

Default value: 3
Range: 0..50
Y_
12 Default value: 0
13 Range: 0..50

ON
Default value: 0
TH
6 MAINTENANCE
Parameters related to the basic configurtation

AN

*6. MAINTENANCE * 1 Ok, Error Virtual activation of Auto-adjustment function, with
Autoatune [1] pressing the button

Device Door

Test [2] 2 Ok, Error Virtual Test function activation, with pressing the button.
Motor Type[3]
Potentiometer [4] 3 Default value: Type of motor adopted in door operator. No need to
Open Speed [5] Asynchronous record this parameter, activation of one or other motor
12
Close Speed [6] Asynchronous: carried out with bit change
Sensitivity [7] Induction motor
Parking Mode [8] Synchronous:
12
Motors Nr. (9) Brushless motor
Version SW (10)
4 Default value: YES Opening and closing speeds, and sensitivity can be
Store Param. [11] YES, NO multiplexed via potentiometer or from memory
20
5 Default value: 500 Current door opening speed

6 Default value: 300 Current door closing speed

G_
7 Range: 4..22 Current reopening sensitivity, on a scale of 4 to 22
Default value: 11
IN
8 Default value: YES Locked or parking mode
NO, YES
9 One, Two This option should be activated in the even of systems
FT
with 2 motors and emergency circuit (different voltages if
1 or 2 motors)
10 Door operator software version
11

Default value: NO
LI Record or not values of modified parameters
NO: Does not record 0 - Does not record EEPROM
AG
EEPROM 1- Updates the 5 pages
YES: Updates the 5 2- Actualiza solo contadores
pages
3- Actualiza solo datos fabricante
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

Device Door
10. Device Load weigh

Load weighing system node
12
10.1. Table of menus of Load weigh
12
Load Weigh' main menu entry
1 FAULTS
20
G_
1.1 LAST FAULT
Shows the last happened fault
IN
FT
*1.1. LAST FAULT * 1 Shows the last fault ocurred in the node Load Weigh.
Fault Nr (1)
Anom.Nr (2) 2 LI Shows the last anomaly ocurred in the node Load Weigh
1.2 FAULTS LIST

AG
Faults list
_T

ER
*1.2. FAULTS LIST * 1

0)(1)... (2)
1)()... () 2 ON, OFF

IN
2)()... ()
1.2.1 FAULT NAME

RD

GA

Y_
*1.2.1. (n)-XXXXXXX* 1 Maximum: 12 characters

Xtra Info (1)
Delete? [2] 2 NO, YES Erases the selected fault
ON
1.2.2 FAULT NAME

TH

AN

*1.2.2. (n)-XXXXXXX* 1 Maximum: 12 characters
Xtra Info (1)
Delete? [2] 2 NO, YES Erases the selected fault

Device Load weigh
1.3 ANOMAL.LIST
12
*1.3. ANOMAL.LIST * 1
0)(1)... (2)
12
1)()... () 2 ON, OFF
2)()... ()
1.3.1 ANOMALY NAME
20
1.3.2 FAULT NAME
G_
IN
1.4 FAULT RECOV.
Try to recover the active faults
FT
*1.4. FAULT RECOV. *

Select YES
No.
1
Mark Possible Values
NO, YES
LI Description
Parameter that activates the routine of recovering the
faults and anomalies of the system. This routine disables
AG
and press Valida[1] possible faults and anomalies and puts them to OFF
1.5 DELETE LISTS

_T
Permits deleting the deactivated Faults and Anomalies of the system.

ER

IN
*1.5. DELETE LISTS * 1 NO, YES Parameter that activates the routine that erases the faults
Select YES and anomalies that are OFF
and press Valida[1]
RD
2 HYSTORIC
GA
List of happened events

Y_
2.1 FAULTS
Historic data of the faults
ON

TH

*2.1. FAULTS * 1 Number of resets that have taken place caused by the

AN
Number resets (1) refresh of the WatchDog

Motive rese(2) Maximum: 12 characters It is shown the task that has produced the reset of the
2
Low reading (3) microcontroller due to the refresh of the WatchDog
High reading (4)
3 NO, YES Variable that shows that there has been a too low reading
of the charge in the car
4 NO, YES Variable that shows that there has been a too high
reading of the charge in the car

Device Load weigh
2.2 LOAD
Historic data of the load.
12
*2.2. LOAD * 1 Indicates which has been the maximum load on the car

12
Max. Load (1)
Average Load (2) 2 Indicates which has been the average load on the car.

20
3 VARIABLES
G_
Load Weigh node's variables
3.1 GENERALS
IN
General variables
FT
*3.1. GENERALS
Logic Pos.
Car weight
*
(1)
(2)
1
2
LI Current floor where the car is placed.
Indicates the current weight of the car. This weight is

Presence (3) indicated in Kgr. If the weighing routine is activated this
AG
Full load (4) variable will refresh in real time.
Overload (5) 3 NO, YES Digital variable that shows the load level of the car. In this
case it is a normal level.
_T
4 NO, YES Digital variable that shows that the load level of the
elevator is Complete Load. This load level corresponds to
the level that goes from 80% to 100% of the nominal load
ER
of the elevator. With this load level the limitations of the

elevator are those characteristiques to this type of load
level.
IN
5 NO, YES Digital variable that shows that the load level of the
elevator is Over Load. This load level corresponds to the
level that goes from 100% to 110% of the nominal load of
the elevator. If the load level is Over Load the elevator is
RD
out of service and stays in that state until the load level
decreases to presence level and the lift returns to its
normal operation.
GA
3.2 MAINTENANCE
Y_
Maintenance variables
ON

*3.2. MAINTENANCE * Variable image of the real weight of the car. This variable
TH
1
Percent. Load (1) shows, in real time, a percentage over the nominal load of
Temperature (2) the elevator of the current weight of the car.
Version SW (3) Temperature next to the regulator. The captator is in the
2
AN
Date SW (4) own Load Weigh card

BOOT Version (5)
3 Maximum: 12 characters Version of software loaded on the Load Weigh card.

4 Maximum: 12 characters Variable that shows the date of creation of the current
software version.
5 Version of bootloader loaded on the Load Weigh card.

Device Load weigh
3.3 INTERNS
Variables related to the node itself
12
*3.3. INTERNS * 1 Position where the car is placed. This variable is
communicated by the controller
12
Pos. actual (1)
Lec. ADC (2) Restricted use to R+D
2
Load level (3)
Cancel Load 3 Feedback of the load level read by the controller
20
weigh(4)
ECEM1 (5) 4 NO, YES Permission of loading from the controller
ECEM2 (6)
G_
SCEM1 (7) 5 NO, YES Contactor of autonomous rescue
SCEM2 (8)
Technical Insp. (9) 6 NO, YES Provisional contactor

IN
Current Inv. (10)d
Motor Sp. (11)c 7 NO, YES Contactor of autonomous rescue
Inverter Torque(12)

Power Sign (13) 8 NO, YES Provisional contactor

FT
9 NO, YES Indicator of the Technical Inspection Mode. This Flag
indicates that the PPQ card is getting information from the
inverter.
10 Units: [s/10]
LI
Variable that indicates the real value of the current of the
inverter.
AG
11 Units: [s/100] Variable that indicates the real value of the speed of the
inverter.
inverter.
_T
13 pos., neg. Sign of the power done by the Inverter

ER
4 FUNCTIONS
IN
Functions of the Load weigh

4.1 PARAMETERS
RD
Functions related to the parameters

GA

Y_
*4.1. PARAMETERS * 1 NO, YES Parameter that allows the executions of the command
Store Param. [1] that records the parameters in the flash memory of the
Pend. Storing (2) Load weigh
ON
2 NO, YES Variable that shows that there has been changes in the
parameters RAM structure and they have not been
recorded
TH
4.2 MAINTENANCE
Functions related to the maintenance
AN


Device Load weigh

*4.2. MAINTENANCE * 1 NO, YES Activation of zero reset routine. This function calculates
Zero adjust. [1] that the weight of the loadweights when activated shall be
Rope adjust. [2] the weight of an empty car. This type of adjustment
Gain adjust. [3] depends on the type of suspension installed. If the
12
Known load [4] suspension is type 1:1 it should be performed with the car
empty and on the lowest floor (bottom end). If the
suspension types 2:1 it should be performed with the car
empty and on the top floor (top end)
12
2 NO, YES Parameter that activates compensation due to traction or
multiple cable weight. This type of adjustment depends
on the type of suspension installed. If the suspension
20
type is 1:1 this adjustment should be activated with an
empty car located at the top floor (multiple cable
compensation). If the suspension type is 2:1 cable
G_
adjustment should be executed with the car empty and on
the lowest floor (traction cable compensation). To perform
this adjustment the zero reset and gain adjustments must
have been performed previously in this order respectively.
IN
This type of adjustment can be used to compensate the
negative effect of traction cables or multiple cables when
measuring the car load.
FT
3 NO, YES Activation of the routine of gain adjustment. This
adjustment will calculate the gain of the weighing system.
It will be given by the characteristics of the installation,
LI the load cell and the electronic card. To adjust the gain
the car must be loaded with a well-known weight and the
executions must be carried out with the car in the top
floor. Keep in mind that the gain adjustment must be
AG
carried out after the zero adjustment. Also as the weight
used for the adjustment gets heavier the precision of the
gain adjustment and the measure of the weighing system
will be better.
_T
4 Parameter used to carry out the gain adjustment. In this

parameter the weight in Kgr. that will be used for the
adjustment will be inserted. As it has been said previously
ER
the heavier the weight used the better for the precision of
the measure.
IN
4.3 INITIALISATION
Functions related to the initialisation
RD

GA

*4.3. INITIALISATIO* 1 NO, YES Parameter that allows the activation of the weighing
Cancel Load routine from the HC. If this parameter is not active the
Y_
weigh[1] weight of the car shown will be 0Kgr, even the car is full.
Reset Load weigh 2 NO, YES Parameter used to activate the function that resets the
[2] node Load Weigh. It is a reset in which the variables and
parameters of the node are initialized. Also the hardware
ON
interfaces like the analogical to digital converters,

analogical and digital outputs, etc...
TH
4.6 FILES
Functions related to management of files of the removable memory card.
AN
4.6.1 CURRENT VERSION INFO

Information about currently loaded software on device.

Device Load weigh

*4.6.1. CURRENT VER* 1 Maximum: 12 characters Version of software loaded on the Load Weigh card.
Version SW (1)
Date SW (2) 2 Maximum: 12 characters Variable that shows the date of creation of the current
software version.
12
4.6.2 SMART MEDIA
12
20
the card.
G_
IN
*4.6.2.1. IDENTIFIC* 1 Name to identify the Smart Media.
Name (1)

FT
Num.Sectors (3)
Bytes/page (5)

Free kB (7)
LI
AG
_T

4.6.2.2 FORMAT
ER
IN

RD
GA
Format [2]
Y_

32 Mb.
ON
4.6.2.3 EXPLORER
TH
AN


Device Load weigh

2
12
3
12
Origin (7)
Version (9)
4
CRC (10)
20
5 File creation time.
Flags (11)

G_

8 Target device.

IN
Cyclic Redundancy Check to check the file is not
FT
10 corrupted.
12
LI Comment about file.
AG
_T

ER

IN

*4.6.2.3.3. TRANSFE* 1 Number of target node to which this file is oriented.
Node(1) IDFil(2)
RD
File (3) 2 Exclusive identification number of file to download.

Transfer? [4]

GA

4.6.2.3.4 VIEW FILE
Y_

ON
4.6.2.3.5 VERIFY
TH
4.6.2.4 REPAIR
AN
5 PARAMETERS
Parameters of the Load weigh

5.1 GENERALS
General parameters of the Load weigh
Device Load weigh

*5.1. GENERALS * 1 S_1, S_2, HID, Mod Main parameter that displays the type of installation it is
Type Instal. [1] working with. This parameter can adopt the following
values: S_1: Installation with 1:1 suspension. S_2:
12
Type Position. [2]
Type sensor [3] Installation with 2:1 suspension. HID: Hydraulic Mod:
Number samples [4] Modernizations.
Main Par. [5] 2 I, II, III Main Parameter that indicates the positioning type of the
12
HID Sensor [6] installation. For further information about positioning
types, see the corresponding chapter to this topic:
Controller.
20
3 ONLY, MULTI Parameter that shows the sensor type that will be used at
the installation. This parameter varies as a function of the
type of installation that will be employed. This parameter
G_
can adopt the following values: UNIQUE: Unique weighing
sensor. MULTI: Weighing sensor for each traction cable.
4 It is possible to program the number of samples that will
be use in the filter used to read the weight of the car.
IN
5 OK, EMPTY Status of the mother parameters. The mother parameters
are those that the controller ARCAII loads on the Load
Weigh when this is connected to the bus CAN. Using this
FT
parametrization makes easier the parametrization of the
Load weigh in the ARCAII controller. The values that this
parameter can get are:
LI OK: The Load Weigh has the parameters of the controller.
AG
EMPTY: The controller has not loaded its parameters.
6 NO, TYPEI, TYPEII Parameter that indicates the type of hydraulic transducer
installed . Depending on the type of transducer, ADC is
_T
configured with gain. Currently two types are

differentiated: TYPEI: Keller, TYPEII: Bilmatic. When there
is no transducer select value NO
ER
5.2 CONFIGURATION
Parameters related to the configuration of the Load Weigh
IN

RD

*5.2. CONFIGURATION* 1 Main Parameter that indicates which is the nominal load of

GA
Nominal load [1] the lift. This parameter will fix the levels of Complete
Number Cables [2] Load, Over Load and Presence.
Diametro Cables [3] Number of ropes of the installation.
2
Compens. Chain [4]
Y_
Gain [5] 3 Diameter of the traction rope that is being used

4 NO, SI Use or not of the compensatory chain

ON
5 Indicates the gain of the installation. The gain of the

installation is given by the characteristic of the load cell,
TH
the installation and the electronic card. This variable is

adjusted by the gain adjustment.
AN
6 SETUP
Menu for the Setup process options.

Device Load weigh

*6. SETUP * 1 Current floor where the car is placed.
Logic Pos. (1)
Indicates the current weight of the car. This weight is
12
Car weight (2) 2
Cancel Load
indicated in Kgr. If the weighing routine is activated this
weigh[3] variable will refresh in real time.
Technical Insp. [4] 3 NO, YES Parameter that allows the activation of the weighing
12
routine from the HC. If this parameter is not active the
weight of the car shown will be 0Kgr, even the car is full.
4 NO, YES Used during the technical inspection. In this operation

20
type the measure is forced to the 90% of the nominal
load of the elevator.
G_
10.2. Description of the faults of the device Load weigh
IN
Description of the faults of the device Load weigh
FT
3 FA_LOW_READ The reading of the sensor is the minimum, Verify that the load sensor is correctly
0x000000. connected, the wires are not damaged and
the supply is right.
4 FA_HIGH_READ
0xFFFFFF.
LI
The reading of the sensor is the maximum, Verify that the load sensor is correctly
connected, the wires are not damaged and
the supply is right
AG
5 FA_WATCHDOG The Load Weigh Device is reset because of the The micro has been blocked in any job and
Watchdog. has been reset. Check in the Historic menu
which job has provoked the situation.
6 FA_TEMPERATURE The read temperature is out of range. Verify that the temperature in the drive box
_T
is between 0 and 60. Otherwise, the error

will remain there.
7 FA_SUPPLY_24VDC Wrong supply level. Verify that the supply of 24dc is arriving
ER
properly in the established limits

8 FA_FEEDBACK Error in the reading of the analog output. Verify that for a defined load, between 0%
and 110%, the analog output gives a
IN
voltage according the load level.

50 AN_LOW_READ The reading of the sensor is 0. Verify that the load sensor is correctly
connected, the wires are not damaged and
RD

51 AN_HIGH_READ The reading of the sensor is the maximum, Verify that the load sensor is correctly
0xFFFFFF. connected, the wires are not damaged and
GA

52 AN_CABLE The reading of one of the sensors is not correct. Check that all the sensors are connected
properly on each cable, no cable is broken or
Y_
has any out of tension

ON
TH
AN

Device Load weigh
11. Device Regulator

Node associated with the regulator device
12
11.1. Table of menus of Regulator
12
Going into the inverter node
1 FAULTS
20
List of last faults
G_
IN
*1. FAULTS * 1 UV, OV, OI.AC, OI.br, The last inverter fault. A little listing of frequently
Last fault (1) O.SPd, PS.24V, tunE1, appearing faults: : DC bus under voltage threshold
FT
Status inverter (2) tunE2, tunE3, tunE4, reached. : DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or
Fault recov. [3] tunE5, tunE6, tunE7, the maximum continuous level for 15 seconds..AC :
tunE, It.br, It.AC, Instantaneous output over current detected: peak output
O.Ld1, Ph, Enc11, current greater than 225%..br : Braking transistor over-
LI
Enc12, Enc13, Enc14,
Enc15, Enc16, Enc17,
current detected: short circuit protection for the braking
transistor activated.SPd : Motor speed has exceeded the
C.FULL, C.Acc, C.rtg, over speed threshold. : AC voltage input phase loss or
AG
C.TyP, Enc1, Enc2, large supply imbalance detected.nE1 : The position
Enc3, Enc4, Enc5, feedback did not change or required speed could not be
Enc6, Enc7, Enc8, reached during the inertia test.nE2 : Position feedback
Enc9, Enc10, DEST direction incorrect or motor could not be stopped during
_T
the inertia test.nE3 : Drive encoder commutation signals

connected incorrectly or measured inertia out of
range.nE4 : Drive encoder U commutation signal fail
ER
during an autotune.nE5 : Drive encoder V commutation

signal fail during an autotune.nE6 : Drive encoder W
commutation signal fail during an autotune.nE7 : Motor
number of poles set incorrectly.nE : Autotune stopped
IN
before completion..br : Braking resistor overload timed

out.
2 Fa, OK Shows if the inverter is OK or out of service.

RD
3 NO, YES Parameter to start a reset inverter faults.

GA
2 HYSTORIC
Y_
History menu
ON

TH

AN

Device Load weigh_R

*2. HYSTORIC * 1 UV, OV, OI.AC, OI.br, The last inverter fault. A little listing of frequently
Fault0 (1) O.SPd, PS.24V, tunE1, appearing faults: : DC bus under voltage threshold
Fault1 (2) tunE2, tunE3, tunE4, reached. : DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or
Fault2 (3) tunE5, tunE6, tunE7, the maximum continuous level for 15 seconds..AC :
12
Fault3 (4) tunE, It.br, It.AC, Instantaneous output over current detected: peak output
Fault4 (5) O.Ld1, Ph, Enc11, current greater than 225%..br : Braking transistor over-
Fault5 (6) Enc12, Enc13, Enc14, current detected: short circuit protection for the braking
Enc15, Enc16, Enc17, transistor activated.SPd : Motor speed has exceeded the
12
Fault6 (7)
Fault7 (8) C.FULL, C.Acc, C.rtg, over speed threshold. : AC voltage input phase loss or
C.TyP, Enc1, Enc2, large supply imbalance detected.nE1 : The position
Fault8 (9)
Enc3, Enc4, Enc5, feedback did not change or required speed could not be
Fault9 (10)
20
Enc6, Enc7, Enc8, reached during the inertia test.nE2 : Position feedback
Enc9, Enc10, DEST direction incorrect or motor could not be stopped during
the inertia test.nE3 : Drive encoder commutation signals
connected incorrectly or measured inertia out of
G_
range.nE4 : Drive encoder U commutation signal fail
during an autotune.nE5 : Drive encoder V commutation
signal fail during an autotune.nE6 : Drive encoder W
IN
commutation signal fail during an autotune.nE7 : Motor
number of poles set incorrectly.nE : Autotune stopped
before completion..br : Braking resistor overload timed
out.
FT
2 Idem Historical faults, fault number 1. (see description of fault
number 0)
3
4
Idem
Idem
LI Historical faults, fault number 2. (see description of fault
number 0)
Historical faults, fault number 3. (see description of fault
number 0)
AG
number 0)
_T

number 0)
number 0)
ER

number 0)
IN

number 0)
number 0)
RD
3 VARIABLES
GA
Variables of the Control Techniques inverter

Y_
3.1 GENERALS
General variables of the Control Techniques inverter.
ON

TH

*3.1. GENERALS * 1 Vo, Viso, Vaprox, Default speed reference level indicator.
Speed ref. (1) Vinsp, V1, V2, V3,
AN
Real speed (2)m Vmax

Output curren(3)d Units: [min] Instantaneous motor speed in mm/s of the car.
2
SecureDisable (4)
Torque (5) 3 Units: [s/10] Instantaneous motor current (tenths of A).
Sign. Torque (6)
Power (7)W 4 OFF, ON Base block status. It's the physical inverter enable/disable
Sign. Power (8) switch.

Device Load weigh_R

Tension BUS (9) 5 Instantaneous motor torque (% of the nominal torque).
Mode (10)
Software (11) 6 pos., neg. Signs of the torque done by the Inverter
SubSoftware (12)
12
Enc Position (13) 7 Units: [W] Power supplied by the Inverter (tenths of kW)

8 pos., neg. Signs of the power supplied by the Inverter

12
9 Voltage of the DC BUS (V)

10 V.L.Cerrado The inverter way of operation.

20
Servo
11 The software version that the inverter has installed.

G_
12 Software subversion.

13 Absolute encoder position.

IN
3.2 STATUS I/O
FT
Input and output variables of the Control Techniques inverter.
No. Mark
LI
*3.2. STATUS I/O * 1 OFF, ON Upwards signal sent by controller.

AG
Up (1)
Down (2) 2 OFF, ON Downwards signal sent by controller.
Speed B1 (3)
_T
Speed B2 (4) 3 OFF, ON Speed B1 signal sent by controller.

Speed B3 (5)

Load Weigh (6) 4 OFF, ON Speed B2 signal sent by controller.
Rescue (7)

ER
5 OFF, ON Speed B3 signal sent by controller.

Brake (8)
6 Analogical reading of the Load Sensor Signal (%).

IN
7 OFF, ON Rescue operation enable signal

8 OFF, ON Brake output state.

RD
GA
4 FUNCTIONS
Functions of the Control Techniques inverter

Y_
4.1 AUTOTUNE
Autotunning of the Control Techniques inverter
ON

TH

*4.1. AUTOTUNE * 1 static Type of Auto Tune that is going to be done. This can be
Type [1] rotative or static.
AN
rotative
Execute function[2]
2 NO, YES Parameter to begin autotuning process.
Stop [3]
Status (4)
3 NO, YES Parameter to force a stop in the autotuning process.


Device Load weigh_R

4 inactivo It shows two different states, active or inactive. If its
activo active, autotune process is still running. If the autotune
process finishes or we force it to stop, his state changes
to inactive.
12
4.2 ROTATION
Change the rotation sense with the Control Techniques
12
20
*4.2. ROTATION * 1 Left, Right Changes the working direction (left or right) based on the

G_
Rotation [1] selected option, changing also the torque signal signs.
4.3 STORE PARAM.
IN
Store the Control Techniques parameters
FT
*4.3. STORE PARAM. *
Store Param.
Status
[1]
(2)
1
2
NO, YES
not pend.
LI Parameter to start a parameter saving operation.
Shows the status of parameters saving. If it is 'pending'

pending means that some parameters have not been saved into
AG
the internal inverter memory yet.
4.4 STORE PARAM.SM

_T
Functions to store the parameters on the Smart Media card of the Control Techniques inverter
ER

IN
*4.4. STORE PARAM.S* 1 NO, YES Records the parameters and PLC from the inverter to the
Inverter->SM [1] Smart Card.
SM->Inverter [2]
RD
2 NO, YES Recovers the parameters and PLC from the Smart Card to
Actualise SM [3] the inverter.
Read SM [4]
3 NO, YES Records the parameters from the inverter to the Smart
Card (not the PLC).
GA
4 NO, YES Recovers the parameters from the Smart Card to the
inverter (not the PLC).
Y_
4.5 RECOV.MOTOR PARAM.

Recover the factory parameters of the motor
ON

TH

*4.5. RECOV.MOTOR P* 1 NO, YES Recovers the factory settings of the parameters recorded

AN
Recov.Motor Para[1] in the encoder.
4.6 RESET
Resets the Control Techniques Inverter

Device Load weigh_R

*4.6. RESET * 1 NO, YES Reset inverter faults.
Reset [1]
12
5 PARAMETERS
12
Parameters of the Control Techniques inverter
5.1 CONTROL MODE
20
Control modus
G_
IN
*5.1. CONTROL MODE * 1 V.L.Cerrado The inverter way of operation.
Mode (1) Servo
FT
5.2 SPEED
Speed parameters
Description of the screen LI
AG
*5.2. SPEED * 1 Units: [min] Speed reference on stop (cm/s).
V.Null [1]m
_T
V00 [2]m 2 Units: [min] Speed reference on relieving (cm/s).

V0 [3]m
VInsp [4]m 3 Units: [min] Creep speed reference (cm/s).

ER
V1 [5]m
V2 [6]m 4 Units: [min] Speed reference on inspection (cm/s).
V3 [7]m

5 Units: [min] Level 1 speed reference (cm/s).
IN
Vmax [8]m

RD

8 Units: [min] Maximum speed reference (cm/s).

GA
5.3 ACCELERATION
Y_
Acceleration parameters
ON

TH
*5.3. ACCELERATION * 1 Units: [min] Acceleration (hundredth of m/s2)

Aceleration [1]m
Deceleration [2]m 2 Units: [min] Deceleration (hundredth of m/s2).
Jerk Viaje [3]m
AN
Jerk Parada [4]m 3 Units: [min] Level of the jerk during the travel (mm/s3)

4 Units: [min] Level of the jerk during the final stop (mm/s3)

5.4 LIFT FUNCT.
Functioning parameters
Device Load weigh_R
5.4.1 SEQUENCE
Sequence parameters
12
*5.4.1. SEQUENCE * 1 Units: [min] Delay for the opening of the brake (ms).

12
Brake open t[1]m
Trip start t[2]d 2 Units: [s/10] Delay for the beginning of the trip (tenths of s).
Brake fall t[3]d
Trip end t. [4]m 3 Units: [s/10] Delay for the fall of the brake (tenths of s).

20
Torque t. [5]d
4 Units: [min] Delay for the end of the trip (ms).

G_
5 Units: [s/10] Current ramp increase time (ms).

5.4.2 SPEED CONTROL
IN
Speed control parameters.
FT
*5.4.2. SPEED CONTR*
Gain P. [1]m
1 Units: [min]
LI Proportional gain of speed loop.
Gain I. [2]c 2 Units: [s/100] Integral gain of speed loop.

AG
Enc. Filter [3]
3 0ms, 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, Speed signal filter (ms).
8ms, 16ms
_T
5.4.3 RESCUE
ER
Rescue parameters
IN

Rescue in favourable load direction.
RD
*5.4.3. RESCUE * 1 OFF, ON

Load favour.dir[1]
Torque limit [2] 2 Torque limit during rescue operation.

GA
5.4.4 LOAD WEIGH

Y_
Load weigh device parameters

ON

*5.4.4. LOAD WEIGH * 1 pos., neg. Load sensor signal compensation signs.
TH
Comp.Sign [1]
Compensation [2] 2 Load sensor compensation.
Adjustment [3]m
AN
Position Control[4] 3 Units: [min] Load sensor signal setting.

Modo AI [5]

4 NO, YES Type of control at start-up. It can be done by signal given
by the load sensor system or by the position control
function.
5 0_20mA Load sensor analog input mode. It can be current (0-
volt 20mA) or Voltage (0-10V).

Device Load weigh_R
5.5 MOTOR PARAM.

Motor parameters
5.5.1 CLOSE LOOP
12
Close loop motor parameters
12
20
*5.5.1. CLOSE LOOP * 1 Units: [s/10] Motor nominal current (tenths of A).
Nom.Current [1]d
Resistance [2]m 2 Units: [min] Motor resistance (mili Ohm).
Inductance [3]m
G_
Poles [4] 3 Units: [min] Motor inductance (micro H).
Nom. Voltage [5]

Rpm nominal [6] 4 Motor number of pole pairs.

IN
Pow. Factor [7]m
5 Motor nominal voltage (V).

6 Nominal speed of the motor in rpm.

FT
7 Units: [min] Specifies the cosine for the angle between motor voltage
and current. Get this from motor rating plate. This value is
LI used along with rated current to calculate the value of
active current used in the control loop.

AG
5.5.2 SERVO
Servo motor parameters
_T

ER

*5.5.2. SERVO * 1 Units: [s/10] Motor nominal current (tenths of A).
Nom.Current [1]d
IN
Resistance [2]m 2 Units: [min] Motor resistance (mili Ohm).

Inductance [3]m
Poles [4] 3 Units: [min] Motor inductance (micro H).
Nom. Voltage [5]

RD
Enc. Angle [6] 4 Motor number of pole pairs.

Nom. RPM [7]

5 Motor nominal voltage (V).

GA
6 Encoder angle.

7 Nominal speed of the motor in rpm.
Y_

5.6 CONTROL PARAM.
ON
Control parameters of the Control Techniques inverter

TH
5.6.1 CLOSE LOOP

Close loop control parameters
AN

*5.6.1. CLOSE LOOP * 1 3Khz, 4Khz, 6Khz, Switching frequency (kHz).
Conmut. Freq[1] 8Khz, 12Khz, 16Khz

Device Load weigh_R

Gain.P.curr. [2] 2 Proportional gain of current loop.
Gain.I.curr. [3]
Filter curr.[4]d 3 Integral gain of current loop.
Torque limit [5]
12
Maximal sp. [6] 4 Units: [s/10] Filter of the motor current measurement (ms).
Without enc. [7]

5 Torque limit in normal operation (% of nominal torque).

12
6 Maximum speed reference (rpm).

7 NO, YES Parameter to enable the inverter to work without encoder.

20
5.6.2 SERVO
G_
Servo control parameters
IN
FT
*5.6.2. SERVO * 1 3Khz, 4Khz, 6Khz, Switching frequency (kHz).
Conmut. Freq[1] 8Khz, 12Khz, 16Khz
Gain.P.curr. [2] Proportional gain of current loop.
2
Gain.I.curr. [3]
Filter curr.[4]d
Torque limit [5]
3
LI Integral gain of current loop.
AG
Maximal sp. [6] 4 Units: [s/10] Filter of the motor current measurement (ms).

5 Torque limit in normal operation (% of nominal torque).

_T
6 Maximum speed reference (rpm).

ER
5.7 CONFIGURATION
Configuration parameters of Control Techniques
IN
5.7.1 ENCODER
Configuration parameters of the encoder of Control Techniques
RD

GA

*5.7.1. ENCODER * 1 AB Type of encoder. Incremental (AB), abs. Heidenhain

Y_
Type [1] SCHiper (SCEndat) or abs. Stegman (SCHyper).

Lines [2]
SCEnDat
Tension alim. [3]
ABServo
ON
Detec. error [4]

2 Encoder lines per rev. Only for incremental (in absolute
encoders it is auto-set).
TH
3 5V, 8V, 15V Encoder supply voltage (V)

4 NO, cable, fase Error detection level. No error, only wiring errors or
wiring+phasing errors.
AN
5.7.2 BRAKE RESISTOR

Configuration parameters of the brake resistor of Control Techniques

Device Load weigh_R

*5.7.2. BRAKE RESIS* 1 Maximum time with the inverter regenerating (ms)
T.Resist.frein [1]
12
5.7.3 PLC
12
Configuration parameters of the PLC of Control Techniques
20
*5.7.3. PLC * 1 NO, SI Enables/disables the PLC program.
G_
Activate [1]
Etat (2) 2 NO, STOP, RUN Status of the PLC program.

IN
5.7.4 SM APPS. LITE
Parameters of the LIFT programming board of Control Techniques
FT
LI Description
*5.7.4. SM APPS. LI* 1 Version of the software in the lift module.

AG
Version SW (1)
Etat (2) 2 NO, STOP, RUN, ERR Status of the software in the lift module.

_T
5.8 MANUAL PARAMETRE

Manual change of Control Techniques parameters
ER

IN

*5.8. MANUAL PARAME* 1 Menu of the parameter which is going to be accessed.

RD
Menu [1].[2]
Data [3] 2 Parameter of the inverter which is going to be accessed.
Signe Data [4]
Reset [5] 3 Value of the parameter.
GA

4 pos., neg. Signs of the parameter.

Y_
5 NO, YES Reset inverter faults.

ON
TH
AN

Device Load weigh_R
12. Device Load weigh_R

Load weighing reduced system node
12
12.1. Table of menus of Load weigh_R
12
Load Weigh' main menu entry
20
1 FAULTS
G_
IN
FT
*1. FAULTS * 1 NO, YES Variable that shows that there has been a too high
Over Sat. (1) reading of the charge in the car
Low Sat. (2) NO, YES Variable that shows that there has been a too low reading
2
Faults recov. [3] of the charge in the car
3 NO, YES
LI Parameter that activates the routine of recovering the
faults and anomalies of the system. This routine disables
possible faults and anomalies and puts them to OFF
AG
2 VARIABLES
_T
Load Weigh node's variables

ER

IN

*2. VARIABLES * 1 Indicates the current weight of the car. This weight is
Car weight (1) indicated in Kgr. If the weighing routine is activated this
RD
Full Load (2) variable will refresh in real time.

OverLoad (3) NO, YES Digital variable that shows that the load level of the
2
Temperature (4) elevator is Complete Load. This load level corresponds to
Version SW (5)
GA
the level that goes from 80% to 100% of the nominal load
Date (6) of the elevator. With this load level the limitations of the
Gain [7] elevator are those characteristiques to this type of load
Percent. Load (8) level.
Y_
Lec. ADC (9) NO, YES Digital variable that shows that the load level of the
3
Cancel Load elevator is Over Load. This load level corresponds to the
weigh(10) level that goes from 100% to 110% of the nominal load of
ON
the elevator. If the load level is Over Load the elevator is

out of service and stays in that state until the load level
decreases to presence level and the lift returns to its
normal operation.
TH
4 Temperature next to the regulator. The captator is in the

own Load Weigh card
AN
5 Version of software loaded on the Load Weigh card.

6 Maximum: 12 characters Variable that shows the date of creation of the current
software version.
7 Indicates the gain of the installation. The gain of the
installation is given by the characteristic of the load cell,
the installation and the electronic card. This variable is
adjusted by the gain adjustment.

Device Load weigh_R

8 Variable image of the real weight of the car. This variable
shows, in real time, a percentage over the nominal load of
the elevator of the current weight of the car.
9 Restricted use to R+D
12

10 NO, YES Permission of loading from the controller

12
3 PARAMETERS
20
Parameters of the Load Weigh
G_
IN
*3. PARAMETERS * 1 Main Parameter that indicates which is the nominal load of
Nominal load [1] the lift. This parameter will fix the levels of Complete
Type Instalatn[2] Load, Over Load and Presence.
FT
Type Position.[3] S_1, S_2, HID, Mod Main Parameter that shows the installation type that it is
2
HID Sensor [4] working with.
Main Par. [5]
3 I, II, III Main Parameter that indicates the positioning type of the
LI installation. For further information about positioning
types, see the corresponding chapter to this topic:
Controller.
AG
4 NO, TYPEI, TYPEII Parameter that indicates the type of hydraulic transducer
installed . Depending on the type of transducer, ADC is
configured with gain. Currently two types are
differentiated: TYPEI: Keller, TYPEII: Bilmatic. When there
_T
is no transducer select value NO

5 OK, EMPTY Status of the mother parameters. The mother parameters
are those that the controller ARCAII loads on the Load
ER
Weigh when this is connected to the bus CAN. Using this

parametrization makes easier the parametrization of the
Load weigh in the ARCAII controller. The values that this
IN
parameter can get are:
OK: The Load Weigh has the parameters of the controller.

RD
EMPTY: The controller has not loaded its parameters.

GA
4 FUNCTIONS
Y_
Functions of the Load Weigh

ON

TH
*4. FUNCTIONS * 1 NO, YES Parameter that allows the executions of the command
Store Param. [1] that records the parameters in the flash memory of the
Pend. Storing (2) Load weigh
Cancel Load
AN
2 NO, YS Variable that shows that there has been changes in the
weigh[3] parameters RAM structure and they have not been
Zero adjust. [4] recorded
Gain adjust. [5] NO, YES Parameter that allows the activation of the weighing
Known load [6] 3 routine from the CT. If this parameter is not active the
Rope adjust. [7] weight of the car shown will be 0Kgr, even the car is full.

Device Load weigh_R

Reset Load weigh 4 NO, YES Activation of zero reset routine. This function calculates
[8] that the weight of the load weights when activated shall
Transfer Mode [9] be the weight of an empty car. This type of adjustment
depends on the type of suspension installed. If the
12
suspension is type 1:1 it should be performed with the car
empty and on the lowest floor. If the suspension type is
2:1 it should be performed with the car empty and on the
top floor.
12
5 NO, YES Activation of the routine of gain adjustment. This
adjustment will calculate the gain of the weighing system.
It will be given by the characteristics of the installation,
20
the load cell and the electronic card. To adjust the gain
the car must be loaded with a well-known weight and the
executions must be carried out with the car in the top
G_
floor. Keep in mind that the gain adjustment must be
carried out after the zero adjustment. Also as the weight
used for the adjustment gets heavier the precision of the
gain adjustment and the measure of the weighing system
IN
will be better.
6 Parameter used to carry out the gain adjustment. In this
parameter the weight in Kgr. that will be used for the
FT
adjustment will be inserted. As it has been said previously
the heavier the weight used the better for the precision of
the measure.
7 NO, YES LI Parameter that activates compensation due to traction or
multiple cable weight. This type of adjustment depends
on the type of suspension installed. If the suspension
type is 1:1 this adjustment should be activated with an
AG
empty car located at the top floor (multiple cable
compensation). If the suspension type is 2:1 cable
adjustment should be executed with the car empty and on
_T
the lowest floor (traction cable compensation). To perform

this adjustment the zero reset and gain adjustments must
have been performed previously in this order respectively.
This type of adjustment can be used to compensate the
ER
negative effect of traction cables or multiple cables when

measuring the car load.
8 NO, YES Parameter used to activate the function that resets the
IN
node Load Weigh. It is a reset in which the variables and

parameters of the node are initialized. Also the hardware
interfaces like the analogical to digital converters,
RD
analogical and digital outputs, etc...

9 NO, YES Parameter that allows putting the board on bootloader
mode. Just for R&D
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

Device Load weigh_R
13. ANNEXE 1 :STATUS OF THE VERTICAL MOVEMENT

AUTOMATISMUS
12
FLOOR TO FLOOR MOVEMENT
(PISO_A_PIS Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov)
12
RESTORATION
(Normal travel between two floors) (RESTAURA Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov)
VALUE STATUS (Travel from a position out of the door
20
zone to let the car at the floor level)
0 Still (except on inspection and
emergency) VALUE STATUS
G_
1 Travelling at high speed or 20 Travelling at high speed or
intermediate speed intermediate speed
2 Levelling before the door zone
IN
21 Levelling before the door zone
3 Levelling after the door zone 22 Levelling after the door zone
105 Levelling (only for Type II and III 106 Levelling (only for Type II and III
FT
positioning system. positioning system.
4 Travelling before the door zone in a 23 Travelling before the door zone in a
movement with start up at levelling
5
speed (floors very near)
Travelling in the door zone in a

LI movement with start up at levelling
speed (starting point very close to
the floor level)
AG
movement with start up at levelling 24 Travelling in the door zone in a
speed (floors very near) movement with start up at levelling
speed (starting point very close to
6 Travelling between the stop point
the floor level)
_T
and the real stop

7 Waiting that the time of the finished
and the real stop
movement after a normal stopping
ER
finishes 26 Waiting that the time of the finished

finishes
movement after stopping because of
IN
a fault finishes 27 Waiting that the time of the finished

a fault finishes
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

SEARCH REFERENCE LEVELLING WITH CLOSE DOORS

(BUS_REF Menu Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov) (ISONIV_PC_N or ISONIV_PC_F Menu
3.2.1. Type Mov)
(Travel to the lowest floor to find the
reference position) (Movement to re-level the cabin with the
12
doors close, from a position inside the
VALUE STATUS door zone)
30 Travelling at high speed or VALOR ESTADO
12
intermediate speed
50 Levelling at normal levelling speed
31 Levelling
51 Levelling at fine levelling speed
20
and the real stop 52 Waiting that the time of the finished
33 Waiting that the time of the finished finishes
G_
finishes 53 Travelling between the stop point
and the real stop
IN
movement after stopping because of 54 Waiting that the time of the finished
a fault finishes movement after stopping because of
a fault finishes
FT
a fault finishes
LEVELLING WITH OPEN DOORS
36 Going out from the zone where CO
is activated.
LI
(ISONIV_PA_N o ISONIV_PA_F Menu
3.2.1. Type Mov)
AG
HOISTWAY
(Movement to re-level the cabin with
(RECO_HUE Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov) doors open, from a position inside the
_T
door zone
(Travel from the lowest floor to the top
floor to check the status of the VALOR ESTADO
positioning elements)
ER
60 Checking the activation of the relay

VALOR ESTADO RPS.
40 Travelling at high speed or 61 Levelling at normal levelling speed

IN
intermediate speed
62 Levelling at fine levelling speed
41 Levelling
RD
42 Travelling between the stop point and the real stop

and the real stop
43 Waiting that the time of the finished movement after a normal stopping
GA
movement after a normal stopping finishes

finishes
44 Waiting that the time of the finished movement after stopping because of
Y_
movement after stopping because of a fault finishes

a fault finishes
ON
RPS signal to start (car bounces)

TH
AN

INSPECTION EMERGENCY
(INSPEC Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov) (SOCORRO Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov)
(Movement provoked by the machine
room emergency pushbutton station)
12
(Movement provoked by the inspection
pushbutton station) VALOR ESTADO
VALOR ESTADO 80 Still
12
70 Still 81 Levelling with position reference and
shaft data (Positioning type II)
71 Travelling at high speed with
20
position reference and shaft data 82 Travelling between the stop point
(Positioning type II) and the real stop
72 Travelling between the stop point 83 Waiting that the time of the finished
G_
and the real stop movement after a levelling in one of
the extreme floors finishes
movement after stopping because of 84 Waiting that the time of the finished
IN
a fault or because any push is more movement after stopping because of
pushed finishes a fault or because any push is more
pushed finishes
74 Levelling with position reference and
FT
shaft data (Positioning type II) 85 Travelling at high speed without
position reference (Positioning type
75 Waiting that the time of the finished II) or without shaft data
movement after a levelling in one of
the extreme floors finishes LI
86 Travelling at high speed with
position reference and shaft data
76 Travelling at high speed without (Positioning type II)
AG
position reference (Positioning type
II) or without shaft data 87 Travelling at high speed with shaft
data (Positioning type I).
77 Travelling at high speed with shaft
_T
data (Positioning type I). 88 Levelling with shaft data (Positioning

type I).
78 Levelling with shaft data (Positioning
type I). 107 Starting control of emergency
ER
movement with UPS.
108 After failure on the starting phase of

emergency movement with UPS.
IN
109 Emergency movement with UPS.

RD

of emergency movement with UPS
finishes
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN

TRAVEL TO THE LOWEST FLOOR RESCUE TO THE NEXT FLOOR (electric).

(hydraulics).
(RESCATE Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov)
(EXT_INF_H Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov)
(Type MAC ) (CT 5.3.4.4 Resc Type =
MAC)
12
(Travel to the lowest floor to park the
cabin in case of fault)
(Travel to the next floor to recuperate
12
VALOR ESTADO the position provoked by the rescue
system because of a phase failure or
90 Going down at high speed power supply failure)
20
91 Travelling at levelling speed when VALUE STATUS
the start up has been in CO or
because of a position fault 10 Starting control
G_
92 Travelling between the stop point 11 After failure on the starting phase
and the real stop
12 Travelling before the stopping point
IN
movement after a normal stopping 13 Travelling between the stop point
finishes and the real stop
94 Waiting that the time of the finished 14 Waiting that the time of the finished
FT
movement after stopping because of movement after a normal stopping
a fault finishes finishes

95 Levelling after going into CO at high
speed LI movement after stopping because of
a fault finishes
AG
RESCUE TO THE NEXT FLOOR (electric).
(RESCATE Menu 3.2.1. Type Mov)
_T
(Type MAC ) (CT 5.3.4.4 Resc Type =

MAC)
ER
(Travel to the next floor to recuperate

the position provoked by the rescue
IN
system because of a phase failure or

power supply failure)
VALOR ESTADO
RD
96 Travelling before the stopping point

GA
and the real stop

Y_
finishes

ON
a fault finishes
TH
AN

14. ANNEXE 2: STATUS OF THE DOORS

AUTOMATISMUS
12
INSPECTION.
VALUE STATUS
12
1 Opening
2 Closing
20
3 Status of input-output of the automatisms
4 Close during a travel
G_
5 Close waiting for a start up or a deactivation
IN
EMERGENCY
VALUE STATUS
FT
11 Opening
12 Closing
13
LI
Status of input-output of the automatisms

AG
15 Close waiting for a start up or a deactivation
_T
NORMAL
VALUE STATUS
ER
20 Normal status of the door automatisms
21 Opening
IN
22 Open discounting the open door time
23 Open
RD
24 Closing normal.

GA
26 Close finish
27 Closing because of nugging

Y_
28 Forced closing (Fireman re-sending)
29 Close
ON
30 Control of lock failure
31 Still with a lock fault

TH
ENGLISH FIREMAN
AN
(Corresponding to the automatisms of the fireman in car for the

English ( Menu 5.9.2 Tipo Bomb Ingles) or American fireman type (
Menu 5.9.2 Tipo Bomb America)
VALUE STATUS
50 Opening automatically
Copyright Orona 2009

51 Open.
52 Closing automatically
53 Status of input-output of the automatisms
54 Close finish
12
55 Close
12
57 Closing by pulses (When stopping pushing the call pushbutton, the
status changes to 50)
58 Opening by pulses (When stopping pushing the open door
20
pushbutton, the status changes to 52)
G_
IN
FT
LI
AG
_T
ER
IN
RD
GA
Y_
ON
TH
AN


Maintenance Terminal Manual PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Maintenance Terminal Manual PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

#ANTHONY_GARDINER_TAGLIFTING_201212#

ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL

TOOL FOR MODERNIZATION

Document code: 0466005.IEN

Copyright Orona 2011. All rights reserved.

4.5. Example - Speeds .......................................................................................... 15

5.1. Table of menus of CT ...................................................................................... 17

6. Device Control .................................................................................................. 20

6.2. Description of the faults of the device Control ................................................... 103

7.1. Table of menus of Autodialler ......................................................................... 122

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 2/182

5 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 131

1 FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 156

3 VARIABLES ........................................................................................................ 158

5 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 162

11.1. Table of menus of Regulator ........................................................................... 165

1 FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 165

3 VARIABLES ........................................................................................................ 166

5 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 169

12.1. Table of menus of Load weigh_R ..................................................................... 174

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 3/182

13. ANNEXE 1 :STATUS OF THE VERTICAL MOVEMENT AUTOMATISMUS ....................... 177

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 4/182

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 5/182

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 6/182

3. HANDLING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

Do not press on the display screen.

3.1. Connecting Points

Connection Connect direct to the Connect direct to the communications bus.

Normal Only connector J9 on the Connector J27 of the communications bus of

points (PBCM). Female-Female

Connector J7 on the connecting strip of the

Connecting None Extension cable 1 for landing control station.

requiring an Monochrome LCD position indicator.

Other None Gateway connector J1 for shared control

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 7/182

Connection to ARCA controller Connection to ARCAII controller

3.2. CONNECTING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 8/182

1. Insert the Configuration Tool connector in the appropriate connector.

CONNECTING TO ARCA CONTROLLERS

Ver UN:1.0 HC:1.00

(12: 4:10)( 3/10/04)

CONNECTING TO ARCAII CONTROLLERS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 9/182

Ver UN:1.0 HC:1.00

LOGGING ON THE CONTROLLER (BOTH ARCA AND ARCAII)

No. of the version of

CONTROLLER STEP 2. Introducing the password:

1. Press (the cursor will be flashing between the Password brackets).

2. Type the password (maximum 4 digits).

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 10/182

4. OPERATING THE CONFIGURATION TOOL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ARCAII CONFIGURATION TOOL 11/182

4.1. Moving through the Configuration Tool menus

A menu display screen may be as follows:

Numeration of the menu

: Moves the cursor which points at a submenu one line upwards.

: Provides access to the menu pointed to by the cursor .

4.2. Movement through a dialogue menu

A dialogue menu display screen may be as follows:

Numeration of the menu

3.1. GENERALES Values of the variables or

1.2. FAULTS LIST 1 Fault Identifier.